Furuno Radar Detector 1723C User Manual
MARINE RADAR  
MODEL1722/1732/1742/1752/1762  
MODEL1722C/1732C/1742C/1752C/1762C  
MODEL1723C/1733C/1753C/1763C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Radio Frequency  
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD  
Do not open the equipment.  
Radiation Hazard  
Only qualified personnel  
should work inside the  
equipment.  
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic  
radio frequency (RF) energy which can be  
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never  
look directly into the antenna aperture from  
a close distance while the radar is in  
operation or expose yourself to the trans-  
mitting antenna at a close distance.  
Do not disassemble or modify the  
equipment.  
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can  
result.  
Distances at which RF radiation levels of  
100 and 10 W/m2 exist are given in the  
table below.  
Immediately turn off the power at the  
switchboard if the equipment is emitting  
smoke or fire.  
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a  
close distance in front of the wheel house,  
your administration may require halt of  
transmission within a certain sector of  
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask  
your FURUNO representative or dealer to  
provide this feature.  
Continued use of the equipment can cause  
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO  
agent for service.  
Keep heater away from equipment.  
A heater can melt the equipment's power  
cord, which can cause fire or electrical  
shock.  
Distance to  
10 W/m  
Distance to  
100 W/m  
MODEL  
2
2
point  
point  
1722  
1722C  
1723C  
Worst case  
1.50 m  
Use the proper fuse.  
Nil  
Fuse rating is shown on the equipment.  
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage  
to the equipment.  
1732  
Worst case  
4.00 m  
1732C  
1733C  
0.40 m  
Nil  
Worst case  
1.00 m  
1742  
1742C  
1752  
Worst case  
2.00 m  
1752C  
1753C  
0.15 m  
0.60 m  
CAUTION  
1762  
1762C  
1763C  
Worst case  
5.20 m  
A warning label is attached to the equip-  
ment. Do not remove the label. If the  
label is missing or damaged, contact  
a FURUNO agent or dealer about  
replacement.  
CAUTION  
Name: Warning Label (1)  
WARNING  
No one navigation device should ever be  
solely replied upon for the navigation of  
a vessel.  
Type: 86-003-1011-0  
To avoid electrical shock, do not  
remove cover. No user-serviceable  
Code No.: 100-236-230  
parts inside.  
Always confirm position against all available  
aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and  
crew.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FOREWORD ...................................................................................................... viii  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .............................................................................. x  
WHAT IS WAAS?................................................................................................ xii  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .........................................................................1-1  
1.1 Operating Controls ...................................................................................................... 1-2  
1.1.1 Display unit controls ......................................................................................... 1-2  
1.1.2 Remote controller............................................................................................. 1-5  
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card ................................................................................................. 1-6  
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off................................................................................................ 1-7  
1.4 Cursor Pad, Cursor...................................................................................................... 1-8  
1.5 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast, Hue ....................................................... 1-9  
1.5.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance..................................................................... 1-9  
1.5.2 Contrast.......................................................................................................... 1-10  
1.5.3 Hue (MODEL1722C/1723C series) ................................................................ 1-10  
1.6 Selecting a Display.....................................................................................................1-11  
1.6.1 Display modes.................................................................................................1-11  
1.6.2 Selecting a display.......................................................................................... 1-12  
1.6.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens.................................... 1-13  
1.6.4 Selecting radar source.................................................................................... 1-14  
1.7 Data Boxes................................................................................................................ 1-15  
1.7.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key........................................................ 1-15  
1.7.2 Rearranging data boxes ................................................................................. 1-15  
1.7.3 Temporarily erasing a data box....................................................................... 1-15  
1.8 Function Keys............................................................................................................ 1-16  
1.8.1 Executing a function ....................................................................................... 1-16  
1.9 Simulation Display..................................................................................................... 1-17  
2. RADAR OPERATION.....................................................................................2-1  
2.1 Radar Display.............................................................................................................. 2-1  
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by................................................................................................. 2-2  
2.3 Tuning ......................................................................................................................... 2-2  
2.4 Adjusting the Gain ....................................................................................................... 2-2  
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter................................................................................................... 2-4  
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works ................................................................................... 2-4  
2.5.2 Adjusting A/C SEA............................................................................................ 2-4  
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter ..................................................................................... 2-5  
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN..................................................................................... 2-5  
2.6.2 Adjusting the FTC............................................................................................. 2-6  
2.7 Range Scale................................................................................................................ 2-7  
2.8 Pulselength.................................................................................................................. 2-8  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9 Presentation Mode.......................................................................................................2-9  
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode..........................................................................2-9  
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes..................................................................2-10  
2.10 Measuring the Range...............................................................................................2-12  
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings....................................................................2-12  
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor............................................................................2-13  
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM .............................................................................2-14  
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication....................................................................2-15  
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes.......................................................................2-15  
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes.........................................................................2-15  
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes .......................................................................2-15  
2.11 Measuring the Bearing .............................................................................................2-15  
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor.........................................................................2-15  
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL............................................................................2-15  
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication.....................................................................2-16  
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes.......................................................................2-16  
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes.........................................................................2-16  
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes........................................................................2-16  
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker ..................................................................2-17  
2.13 Reducing Noise........................................................................................................2-17  
2.14 Reducing Radar Interference ...................................................................................2-18  
2.15 Zoom........................................................................................................................2-19  
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets ..........................................................................2-19  
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets ...........................................................................2-19  
2.16 Shifting the Picture...................................................................................................2-20  
2.16.1 Manual shift ..................................................................................................2-20  
2.16.2 Automatic shift...............................................................................................2-21  
2.17 Using the Offset EBL................................................................................................2-22  
2.17.1 Predicting a collision course..........................................................................2-22  
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets...........................................2-23  
2.18 Echo Trails...............................................................................................................2-24  
2.18.1 Trail time.......................................................................................................2-24  
2.18.2 Starting echo trails ........................................................................................2-25  
2.18.3 Trail brilliance (MODEL1722 series)..............................................................2-25  
2.18.4 Trail gradation (MODEL1722C/1723C series)...............................................2-25  
2.18.5 Trail color (MODEL1722C/1723C series)......................................................2-26  
2.19 Echo Stretch.............................................................................................................2-27  
2.20 Echo Averaging........................................................................................................2-28  
2.21 Outputting TLL Data.................................................................................................2-29  
2.22 Guard Alarm.............................................................................................................2-30  
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone...........................................................................2-30  
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated… ........................................................................2-31  
2.22.3 Canceling the guard alarm............................................................................2-31  
2.23 Watchman................................................................................................................2-32  
2.23.1 How watchman works...................................................................................2-32  
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman...............................................................................2-32  
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval...............................................................2-32  
2.24 Waypoint Marker......................................................................................................2-33  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.25 ARP (option), TTM operation ................................................................................... 2-34  
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM ................................................................. 2-35  
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP only)..................................................... 2-36  
2.25.3 Displaying target number (internal, external ARP) ........................................ 2-37  
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.............................................................. 2-38  
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP) ..................................................................... 2-39  
2.25.6 Displaying past position display (ARP) ......................................................... 2-40  
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data.................................................................................... 2-41  
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)................................................................................ 2-42  
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)................................................................................ 2-43  
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display ................................................................................. 2-44  
2.26.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2-44  
2.26.2 False echoes................................................................................................ 2-46  
2.26.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)..................................................... 2-48  
2.26.4 Racon (Radar Beacon)................................................................................. 2-50  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION.................................................................................3-1  
3.1 Plotter Displays............................................................................................................ 3-1  
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display................................................................................. 3-1  
3.1.2 Compass display.............................................................................................. 3-3  
3.1.3 Highway display ............................................................................................... 3-5  
3.1.4 Nav data display............................................................................................... 3-6  
3.2 Presentation Mode....................................................................................................... 3-7  
3.2.1 North-up ........................................................................................................... 3-7  
3.2.2 Course-up ........................................................................................................ 3-8  
3.2.3 Auto course-up ................................................................................................. 3-8  
3.3 Shifting the Display...................................................................................................... 3-9  
3.4 Chart Scale.................................................................................................................. 3-9  
3.5 Chart Cards............................................................................................................... 3-10  
3.5.1 Chart card overview........................................................................................ 3-10  
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement.........................................................................3-11  
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts™............................................................................ 3-12  
3.5.4 C-MAP cards.................................................................................................. 3-14  
3.6 Working with Track .................................................................................................... 3-18  
3.6.1 Displaying track.............................................................................................. 3-18  
3.6.2 Stopping, restating plotting of own ship track.................................................. 3-19  
3.6.3 Changing track color (MODEL1722C/1723C series)....................................... 3-20  
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track ..................................... 3-21  
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting.......................................... 3-22  
3.6.6 Erasing track .................................................................................................. 3-23  
3.7 Marks, Lines.............................................................................................................. 3-25  
3.7.1 Entering a mark.............................................................................................. 3-25  
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes................................................................................ 3-25  
3.7.3 Selecting line type .......................................................................................... 3-26  
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines ....................................................................................... 3-27  
3.8 Waypoints.................................................................................................................. 3-29  
3.8.1 Entering waypoints ......................................................................................... 3-29  
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data ..................................................................................... 3-32  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints...........................................................................................3-34  
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™).................................3-35  
3.8.5 Searching waypoints.......................................................................................3-36  
3.9 Routes .......................................................................................................................3-37  
3.9.1 Creating routes ...............................................................................................3-37  
3.9.2 Connecting routes...........................................................................................3-41  
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints .........................................................................................3-42  
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route...................................................................3-44  
3.9.5 Erasing routes.................................................................................................3-44  
3.10 Navigation................................................................................................................3-45  
3.10.1 Navigating to a "quick point"..........................................................................3-45  
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints ................................................................................3-46  
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts™ C-MAP) ..............................3-47  
3.10.4 Following a route...........................................................................................3-49  
3.11 Alarms ....................................................................................................................3-53  
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off .........................................................................................3-53  
3.11.2 Arrival alarm..................................................................................................3-54  
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm.......................................................................................3-55  
3.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm......................................................................3-56  
3.11.5 Speed alarm..................................................................................................3-56  
3.11.6 Proximity alarm .............................................................................................3-57  
3.11.7 Trip alarm......................................................................................................3-58  
3.11.8 Alarm information ..........................................................................................3-59  
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance............................................................................................3-60  
3.13 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ..............................................3-61  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ...................................................................4-1  
4.1 Principle of Operation...................................................................................................4-1  
4.2 Sounder Displays.........................................................................................................4-2  
4.2.1 Selecting a sounder display ..............................................................................4-2  
4.2.2 Description of sounder displays ........................................................................4-3  
4.2.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays......................................4-7  
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation ......................................................................................4-8  
4.3.1 How the automatic sounder works ....................................................................4-8  
4.3.2 Types of automatic sounder modes...................................................................4-8  
4.3.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation .....................................................4-8  
4.4 Manual Sounder Operation..........................................................................................4-9  
4.4.1 Selecting the manual mode...............................................................................4-9  
4.4.2 Selecting display range.....................................................................................4-9  
4.4.3 Adjusting the gain..............................................................................................4-9  
4.4.4 Range shifting.................................................................................................4-10  
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time.............................................................................................. 4-11  
4.6 Reducing Interference................................................................................................4-12  
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise.........................................................................................4-13  
4.8 Erasing Weak Echoes ..............................................................................................4-14  
4.9 White Marker (MODEL1722C/1723C series)..............................................................4-15  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.10 Picture Advance Speed............................................................................................ 4-16  
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed................................................... 4-16  
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed.............................................. 4-17  
4.11 Display Colors (MODEL1722C/1723C series).......................................................... 4-18  
4.12 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 4-19  
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off......................................................................................... 4-19  
4.12.2 Bottom alarm................................................................................................ 4-20  
4.12.3 Fish alarm..................................................................................................... 4-20  
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L)............................................................................................ 4-21  
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm.............................................................................. 4-22  
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated................................................................. 4-23  
4.13 Water Temperature Graph ....................................................................................... 4-24  
4.14 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate.............................................................................. 4-24  
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display.............................................................................. 4-25  
4.15.1 Zero line ....................................................................................................... 4-25  
4.15.2 Bottom echo ................................................................................................. 4-25  
4.15.3 Fish school echoes....................................................................................... 4-26  
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration ................................................................................. 4-26  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT..........................................................................5-1  
5.1 Generic Setup.............................................................................................................. 5-1  
5.2 Radar Setup ................................................................................................................ 5-3  
5.2.1 Radar display setup.......................................................................................... 5-3  
5.2.2 Radar range setup............................................................................................ 5-6  
5.2.3 Function key setup ........................................................................................... 5-7  
5.3 Plotter Setup................................................................................................................ 5-9  
5.3.1 Navigation options............................................................................................ 5-9  
5.3.2 Function key setup ......................................................................................... 5-10  
5.4 Chart Setup ............................................................................................................... 5-12  
5.4.1 Chart offset..................................................................................................... 5-12  
5.4.2 FURUNO, Nav-Charts™ chart attributes ........................................................ 5-13  
5.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes ................................................................................... 5-16  
5.5 Data Boxes Setup...................................................................................................... 5-20  
5.6 Hot Page Setup......................................................................................................... 5-21  
5.7 Navigator Setup......................................................................................................... 5-23  
5.7.1 Navigation data source................................................................................... 5-23  
5.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B) ................................ 5-24  
5.7.3 TD display setup............................................................................................. 5-27  
5.8 Nav Data Display Setup............................................................................................. 5-29  
5.9 Sounder Setup........................................................................................................... 5-30  
5.9.1 System setup.................................................................................................. 5-30  
5.9.2 Sensor setup.................................................................................................. 5-32  
5.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range............................................ 5-33  
5.9.4 Function key setup ......................................................................................... 5-34  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER..........................................................................................6-1  
6.1 Memory Card Operations.............................................................................................6-1  
6.1.1 Formatting memory cards .................................................................................6-1  
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card ..........................................................................6-2  
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card.............................................................6-4  
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data......................................................................................6-5  
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC.......................................................6-5  
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data.........................................................................6-5  
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman ..........................................................................6-8  
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment.......................................................................6-9  
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network........................................................................6-10  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................7-1  
7.1 Preventive Maintenance...............................................................................................7-1  
7.2 Replacement of Fuse...................................................................................................7-2  
7.3 Replacement of Battery................................................................................................7-2  
7.4 Simple Troubleshooting................................................................................................7-3  
7.4.1 General.............................................................................................................7-3  
7.4.2 Radar................................................................................................................7-4  
7.4.3 Plotter...............................................................................................................7-5  
7.4.4 Sounder............................................................................................................7-6  
7.5 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................7-7  
7.5.1 Memory I/O test ................................................................................................7-7  
7.5.2 Test pattern.....................................................................................................7-10  
7.5.3 Keyboard, remote controller test ..................................................................... 7-11  
7.6 GPS Status Display....................................................................................................7-12  
7.7 Clearing Memories.....................................................................................................7-13  
7.8 Error Messages..........................................................................................................7-14  
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................AP-1  
Menu Overview............................................................................................................... AP-1  
Geodetic Chart List ....................................................................................................... AP-12  
World Time Chart.......................................................................................................... AP-13  
Icons............................................................................................................................. AP-14  
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... SP-1  
INDEX..........................................................................................................Index-1  
Declaration of Comformity  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
A Word to the Owner of the MODEL1722/1722C/1723C  
Series Marine Radar  
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the  
MODEL1722/1722C/1723C Series Marine Radar. We are confident you will  
discover why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and  
reliability.  
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable  
reputation for quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to  
excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.  
Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the  
marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function  
unless properly installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the  
operation and maintenance procedures set forth in this manual.  
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are  
achieving our purposes.  
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
Features  
The MODEL1722/1722C/1723C series work within our new product-network  
system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate  
with NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol  
through an Ethernet 10 Base-T network.  
The main features are  
ꢀ Bright 7” screen visible even under direct sunlight.  
MODEL1722 series: Monochrome LCD  
MODEL1722C series: Color LCD  
MODEL1723C series: High-precision color LCD  
ꢀ User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys and cursor pad.  
ꢀ Accepts FURUNO and Nav-charts™ (NAVIONICS) or C-MAP NT/NT+ charts (C-MAP).  
All names mentioned are registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
ꢀ Fast chart redraw.  
ꢀ Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.  
ꢀ 12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally  
available or GP-320B with WAAS (see the note in below.)  
ꢀ User programmable function keys.  
ꢀ Video sounder picture available with connection to optional network sounder.  
ꢀ ARP function (when connecting with MODEL1833/1833C series)  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS  
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each  
NavNet product on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T).  
Each NavNet product is assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images  
between other NavNet products. For example, video plotter pictures can be  
transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures received via the NavNet may be  
adjusted at the receiving end.  
The number of display units which may be installed depends on the number of  
network sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products,  
a “hub” is required to process data.  
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters  
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters  
NavNet system  
Antenna Unit  
GPS receiver  
(ex. MODEL 1722/1722C/1723C)  
GP-310B/320B  
Display Unit  
E/S  
Navigator  
RDP-130 (monochrome)  
RDP-131 (color, QVGA)  
RDP-143 (color, VGA)  
External buzzer  
PC  
Echo sounder  
Remote  
Controller  
RMC-100  
Heading  
sensor  
Rectifier*  
PR-62  
Other NavNet unit  
(GD-1700 etc.)  
RU-3423  
Network sounder  
ETR-6/10N  
ETR-30N  
12-24 VDC  
100/110/115/220/230 VAC  
1φ, 50/60 Hz  
*PR-62: MODEL1722/1722C/1732/1732C/1723C/1733C  
RU-3423: MODEL1742/1742C/1752/1752C/1762/1762C/1753C/1763C  
NavNet system  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS  
Two-unit NavNet system  
GP-310B/320B  
Antenna Unit  
Radar data  
Plotter data  
Two-unit NavNet system  
Three-or more unit NavNet system (Max. 4 NavNet capable display units)  
GP-310B/320B  
Antenna Unit  
Radar data  
Plotter data  
HUB  
Note: The picture disappears  
10 seconds after the NavNet  
cable is disconnected from a  
"sub" NavNet display unit.  
Sounder data  
Network Sounder  
ETR-6/10N  
ETR-30N  
Network Sounder  
ETR-6/10N  
ETR-30N  
(option)  
(option)  
Three-or more unit NavNet system  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT IS WAAS?  
WAAS, available in North America, is a provider in the worldwide SBAS (Satellite  
Based Augmentation System) navigation system. SBAS provides GPS signal  
corrections to SBAS users, for even better position accuracy, typically better  
than three meters. Two more SBAS providers are also currently under  
development, MSAS (Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System) for Japan  
and EGNOS (Euro Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service) for Europe. All  
provides will be compatible with one another, thus providing “seamless” position  
fixes to SBAS users.  
150°W  
120°W  
90°W  
60°W  
30°W  
0
30°E  
60°E  
90°E  
120°E  
150°E  
60°N  
40°N  
60°N  
40°N  
EGNOS  
MSAS  
20°N  
20°N  
134  
122  
120  
131  
0
0
WAAS  
20°S  
20°S  
40°S  
60°S  
40°S  
60°S  
150°W  
120°W  
90°W  
60°W  
30°W  
0
30°E  
60°E  
90°E  
120°E  
150°E  
Satellite, Region  
120, AOR-E  
122, AOR-W  
131, IOR  
Position  
15.5°W  
54°W  
64.5°E  
178°E  
Initial operation time  
WAAS: 2003  
EGNOS: 2004  
MSAS: 2005  
134, POR  
At the time of this software release, SBAS is still under development (Providers  
are expected to have initial operations capability from the times shown above.)  
During this developmental period, which may last for several years, there is no  
guarantee of the accuracy, integrity, continuity, or availability of the SBAS signal.  
Furuno will accept no responsibility for the use of the signal for other than the  
above stated purpose. It is the user’s responsibility to exercise common  
prudence and navigational judgment while using the SBAS signal.  
Note: This manual uses “WAAS” when referring to any SBAS provider.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
This chapter provides basic information needed to get you started using your  
radar. The follow topics are presented:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Control overview  
Chart card insertion  
Power on/off  
Contrast, brilliance and hue (Color series only) adjustments  
Display selection  
Data boxes  
Function keys  
Simulation display  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
The brilliance of the LCD is adjustable  
to match a wide variety of lighting  
conditions. However, its maximum  
setting may not be sufficiently bright  
to permit viewing of the display with  
polarized sunglasses.  
Note: The example screens shown in this manual may not match the screens  
you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system  
configuration and equipment settings.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.1  
Operating Controls  
1.1.1  
Display unit controls  
Overview of display unit controls  
The radar systems are mainly operated with controls of the display unit (and  
remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on  
their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current  
operating mode. The [ENTER] knob mainly functions to register selections on  
the menu and enter alphanumeric data. The cursor pad’s main function is to  
move the cursor across the screen. Whenever you operate a key, a single beep  
confirms operation. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.  
Cursor pad  
Selects display mode.  
Selects menu items and options;  
shifts cursor. Press, release and  
press again to change setting  
consecutively.  
Opens/closes the alarm menu.  
Clears data; erases selected mark.  
Momentary press:  
Registers own ship’s  
position as a waypoint.  
Press three seconds:  
Marks man overboard  
position.  
Opens/closes the main menu.  
Selects a range.  
ENTER knob  
Push: Registers options on menus.  
Rotate: Selects character; adjusts sensitivity  
(sounder, radar); chooses menu items and options.  
Displays the soft keys for EBL/VRM.  
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of  
gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC.  
Sounder: Adjusts gain.  
Soft keys  
Long press: Turns power on/off.  
Momentary press: Opens the  
display for adjustment of brilliance,  
Shows or hides the soft  
keys, function keys,  
nav data alternately.  
etc. For radar, switches STBY and TX.  
Chart slot  
Control panel  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
Soft keys  
The five soft keys’ functions change according to the operation. Their labels for  
their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys. To hide or  
show the soft key labels, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key. Each press of the key  
shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information (at  
the top of the screen).  
SOFT  
KEYS  
Display unit  
Some soft keys show the current state of the soft key function in reverse video  
as shown below.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
SIGNAL  
PROCESS  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
I. REJ  
LOW  
E. AVG*  
OFF  
PULSE  
SHORT  
Current option  
shown in reverse  
video  
E. STR  
LOW  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
*: Only when MODEL 1833/C series are  
used as radar source.  
Plotter display  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
[ENTER] knob  
The [ENTER] knob functions to  
Register data  
Enter alphanumeric data such as waypoint name  
•
•
•
•
Select menu items and options  
Adjust setting  
Clockwise rotation of the knob selects an alphabet, symbol or numeric, in one of  
the sequences shown below. After you have selected desired alphanumeric  
character push the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
[ENTER] knob  
ENTER knob  
Alphabet, symbol, numeric  
A ! B ! C ! D ! E ! F ! G ! H ! I ! J ! K ! L ! M ! N ! O ! P ! Q !  
R ! S ! T ! U ! V ! W ! X ! Y ! Z ! & ! _ ! ’ ! # ! 0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 !  
4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 ! 8 ! 9  
Numerics  
0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 ! 8 ! 9  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.1.2  
Remote controller  
Operating distance  
90°: Up to 5 m  
±45°: Up to 3 m  
SAVE  
MOB  
Replace the batteries (AA) when the  
distance from which the display  
unit can be operated shortens.  
RANGE  
DISP  
1
4
7
2
3
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
GHI  
Note: The remote controller may  
become damaged if dropped.  
Mishandling of the remote  
controller is not covered by  
the warranty.  
5
8
6
9
MNO  
VWX  
PQR  
YZ&  
STU  
0
EBL/VRM  
WPT  
’#  
GAIN  
CENTER  
MARK  
ENT  
CNTL  
ENT  
CLEAR  
MENU  
TX / STBY  
ALARM  
ACQ  
BRILL  
SK1  
TONE  
HIDE / SHOW  
SK2  
SK3  
SK4  
SK5  
Remote controller  
Key  
Function  
Key  
Function  
RANGE  
CLEAR  
MENU  
BRILL  
Same as RANGE key on  
display unit.  
Same as CLEAR key on  
display unit.  
DISP  
Same as DISP key on  
display unit.  
Same as MENU key on  
display unit.  
SAVE MOB  
Adjusts display brilliance.  
Same as SAVE MOB key on  
display unit.  
Ten keys  
Enter alphanumerics.  
TONE  
Adjusts display contrast.  
EBL/VRM  
TX/STBY  
Same as EBL/VRM key on  
display unit.  
Toggles radar between  
standby and transmit.  
GAIN  
ACQ  
Same as GAIN key on  
display unit.  
Acquires radar target.  
(Requires radar source  
equipped with ARP.)  
WPT  
ALARM  
Displays “alphabet” WPT list  
on plotter display.  
Same as ALARM key on the  
display unit.  
MARK ENT  
CENTER  
CNTL  
HIDE/SHOW  
Same as MARK ENTRY soft  
key.  
Same as HIDE/SHOW key  
on display unit.  
Returns own ship to screen  
center on plotter display.  
SK1 – SK5  
(soft keys)  
Same as soft keys on  
display unit.  
ENT  
Switches control between  
displays on combination  
displays.  
Same as ENTER knob on  
display unit.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.2  
Inserting a Chart Card  
Your unit reads FURUNO and Nav-Charts™ (NAVIONICS), or C-MAP chart  
cards, depending on its specifications. Insert the appropriate chart card for your  
area as follows:  
1. Open the chart card slot lid.  
Chart slot  
Display unit  
2. Insert desired chart card groove side up.  
3. Close the lid to protect the chart drive.  
Note 1: Do not insert or remove the chart card while turning power on. This may  
cause the equipment to freeze.  
Note 2: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause  
the equipment to freeze.  
Note 3: A card remover is supplied to ease removal of chart cards. Attach the  
card remover to the right-hand side hole on the card and pull to remove  
card. You can leave the card remover attached to the card while the  
card is in the card slot - push the card remover leftward until it contacts  
the recessed area in the card.  
Note 4: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more  
than one display unit.  
Chart card and card remover  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.3  
Turning the Unit On/Off  
Press the [POWER/BRILL] key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and the  
equipment proceeds in the sequence shown below, displaying the product  
information screen, startup test results and the chart usage disclaimer, in that  
order. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data  
for proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If  
NG appears, an appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to  
press any key to go to the chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic  
test referring to the paragraph “7.5 Diagnostics.”  
Chart List  
Host Name  
** = Program version no.  
(Two program version numbers.  
One for NAVIO and one for C-MAP.)  
NO NATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC  
OFFICE HAS VERIFIED THE  
INFORMATION IN THIS  
COASTLINE DATA CARD AND NONE  
ACCEPT LIABILITY FOR THE  
ACCURACY OF REPRODUCTION OR  
ANY MODIFICATIONS MADE  
THEREAFTER. THIS PRODUCT WITH  
THIS COASTLINE DATA CARD  
DOES NOT REPLACE THE  
RADAR PLOTTER  
STARTUP TEST  
ROM  
RAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
BACKUP DATA  
INTERNAL BATTERY  
STATION NAME:  
RADAR  
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.  
CHARTS AVAILABLE  
FLYBRDG = ANB01004  
RADAR = ANB01003  
REQUIREMENT TO USE THE  
APPROPRIATE PRODUCTS FOR  
NAVIGATION ACCORDING TO  
NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL  
REGULATIONS.  
PROGRAM No. 03591730**  
Product information  
Startup test  
Chart disclaimer  
The magnetron in the antenna unit takes about one minutes and thirty seconds  
to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time remaining for warm up of  
the magnetron appears at the center of the display, counting down from 1:30 to  
0:01.  
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used  
display, or wait several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.  
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the [POWER/BRILL] key until the  
screen goes dark (approx. 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover.  
Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes after  
turning off the power.  
Note:You are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides  
simulated operation of the equipment, the first time you turn on the power  
(or any time power is applied after a memory reset) the message shown  
below is displayed. Push the [ENTER] knob to start the simulation mode,  
or press the [CLEAR] key to start normal operation. For further details  
about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.9 Simulation Display.”  
START  
SIMULATION MODE?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
TO SKIP.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.4  
Cursor Pad, Cursor  
The cursor pad mainly functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range  
and bearing to a location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter).  
Operate the cursor pad to shift the cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of  
the arrow or diagonal pressed, on the cursor pad.  
For the plotter display, the cursor can be turned off with the CENTER soft key.  
This also returns own ship marker to the screen center.  
.125nm  
SP  
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M TRIP NU  
M
°
Cursor data  
L/L position,  
Range and  
bearing from  
own ship to  
cursor  
+
.250/  
319.9  
080° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm  
99.9 nm  
H-UP  
Cursor  
SIGNAL  
PROC  
MARK  
ENTRY  
16.0nm  
MODE  
NTH UP  
RADAR  
DISPLY  
NAV  
FUNC  
CENTER  
Cursor  
GOTO  
CURSOR  
TARGET  
ZOOM &  
D. BOX  
D. BOX  
ON/ OFF  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
Radar display  
Plotter display  
Cursor, cursor data  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.5  
Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast,  
Hue  
You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance, contrast and hue  
(MODEL1722C/1723C series only) as shown below.  
1.5.1  
Display brilliance, panel brilliance  
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily. A set of soft keys for  
adjustment of brilliance, contrast and hue (MODEL1722C/1723C series only)  
appear. The last-used adjustment window appears. In the example below the  
display brilliance adjustment window is shown.  
Current selection is higtlighted.  
.125nm  
SP  
.125nm  
SP  
BRILL  
CONTST  
M
M
BRILL  
CONTST  
°
°
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
H-UP  
DISPLY  
BRILL  
DISPLY  
BRILL  
PANEL  
BRILL  
PANEL  
BRILL  
CONTST  
/HUE  
CONTST  
RADAR  
STBY  
RADAR  
STBY  
RETURN  
RETURN  
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE  
8
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE  
8
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Brilliance adjustment soft keys  
2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An  
adjustment window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows  
the name of the item selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by  
bar graph.  
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE  
8
PANEL BRILLIANCE  
8
Display brilliance  
Panel brilliance  
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows  
3. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise  
to decrease it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2, in which  
case the item selected is adjusted cyclically, from low to high. Eight levels of  
display brilliance and panel brilliance are available.  
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.  
The display brilliance can be adjusted by pressing the [POWER/BRILL] key.  
If the unit is turned on with minimum display brilliance, press the  
[POWER/BRILL] key consecutively to adjust the brilliance.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.5.2  
Contrast  
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.  
2. Press the CONTST (monochrome) or CONTST/HUE (color) soft key.  
3. For MODEL1722C/1723C series, two soft keys appear at the pressing of the  
CONTST/HUE soft key: CONTST and HUE. Press the CONTST soft key to  
adjust the contrast.  
CONTRAST  
8
Contrast window  
4. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise  
to decrease it. You may also use the CONTST soft key, in which case the  
item selected is adjusted cyclically, from low to high. 16 levels (monochrome)  
and 10 levels (color) of contrast are available.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
1.5.3  
Hue (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentary.  
2. Press the CONTST/HUE (MODEL1722C series) or HUE (MODEL1723C  
series) soft key.  
3. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.  
HUE  
▲
DAY  
NIGHT  
TWILIGHT  
MANUAL SET  
▲
Hue window  
4. Operate the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob to select hue desired, referring to  
the table below. MANUAL SET follows the color settings on the RADAR  
DISPLAY SETUP for the radar, CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and  
SOUNDER MENU for the sounder.  
Day  
Night  
Twilight  
Applicable mode  
Plotter, radar, sounder  
Radar  
Characters  
Radar ring  
Radar echo  
Background  
Landmass  
Black  
Red  
Green  
Green*  
Red  
Red  
Orange  
Black  
Green*  
Yellow  
Blue  
Radar  
White  
Yellow  
Plotter, radar  
Radar  
Light Yellow Dim Yellow  
*: Red on C-map  
5. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.  
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the  
radar background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL” hue  
setting is used. In this case, set HUE to other position and then return to  
“MANUAL” to show the own ship track in black.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6  
Selecting a Display  
1.6.1  
Display modes  
If you have a navigator and network sounder connected, four full-screen displays  
are available: radar, plotter, and video sounder and navigation data.  
(MODEL1722C/1723C series have five screens, those mentioned above plus  
the overlay screen.) In addition to the full-screen display, you can divide the  
screen into half-screen combination displays to show two sets of images (data).  
Full screen  
(Ex. radar)  
Combination screen  
(Ex. radar + sounder)  
Overlay screen  
(Radar and plotter,  
color model only.  
Requires L/L data)  
Display screens  
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.  
Screen type and available display screen  
Full screen  
Combination screen  
options  
Overlay screen options  
(Color series only)  
Radar + plotter  
Radar, plotter, sounder,  
nav data  
Radar, plotter, echo  
sounder, compass,  
highway,  
compass/highway, nav  
data, overlay  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6.2  
Selecting a display  
1. Press the [DISP] key to show the full-screen selection window. The icons of  
modes not available are marked with “X” mark. PAGE1-PAGE5 are  
user-arrangeable displays called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you  
like. For further details, see “5.6 Hot Page Setup.”  
Basic display  
screens  
RADAR  
PLOT  
SNDR  
NAV  
OVRLY  
PAGE5  
Hot pages  
PAGE1  
PAGE2  
PAGE3 PAGE4  
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE  
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.  
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO  
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.  
Full-screen selection window (“overlay” for color model)  
2. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page  
screen.  
3. Push the [ENTER] knob. If you selected a basic display screen, a set of  
combination display screens corresponding to the basic display screen that  
was selected appear. In the example below, radar combination displays are  
shown.  
PUSH ENTER KNOB.  
Radar combination screen selection window  
4. Operate the [ENTER] knob to select the combination screen display desired  
and push it to set.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6.3  
Switching control in combination and overlay screens  
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens (color series  
only) to switch control between displays. In the example below, the RADAR  
CNTRL and PLOTTR CNTRL soft keys enable switching control between the  
radar and plotter screens in the plotter/radar combination display.  
3nm  
3nm  
12LP  
12LP  
H-UP  
H-UP  
CNTRL  
SIGNAL  
PROC.  
RADAR  
MARK  
ENTRY  
ST-BY  
To adjust  
plotter  
ST-BY  
RADAR  
DISPLY  
MODE  
NTH UP  
NAV  
FUNC  
11.7nm  
3
NAV  
35
°
+
+
POS  
11
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
TARGET  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
99.9 nm  
16.0nm  
PLOTTR  
CNTRL  
16.0nm  
RADAR  
PLOTTR  
CCNTRL  
CNTRL  
To adjust  
radar  
WP-002  
FISH  
WP-002  
FISH  
Radar display selected  
Plotter display selected  
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/radar combination display  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6.4  
Selecting radar source  
When other network radar is connected to the equipment, you may select an  
image source as shown below. This is not necessary when no other network  
radar is connected. Select one host name for the source though there are two or  
three radar units on the net.  
Note: Turn the power off whenever changing the source.  
1. Press the [DISP] key.  
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.  
SELECT  
SOURCE  
RADAR SOURCE  
RADAR  
- - -  
SOUNDER SOURCE*  
SOUNDER  
EDIT  
-
IP ADDRESS  
172.031.003.001  
HOST NAME  
RADAR  
- - -  
IF THERE IS MORE THAN  
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR  
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY  
SELECT THE IMAGE  
RETURN  
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.  
*: Do not change this setting.  
Select source menu  
3. Use the cursor pad to select RADAR SOURCE and press the EDIT key.  
RADAR SOURCE  
RADAR  
- - -  
Radar source  
Radar source and sounder source windows  
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter source host name: ◄ or ► to  
select position and rotate the [ENTER] knob to select character.  
5. Press the [ENTER] soft key or [ENTER] knob.  
6. Confirm that the correct host name is entered.  
7. Press the [DISP] key to finish.  
8. Turn the power off and on again.  
Note: Sources names are determined at installation. For example, the source  
names for radars in a two radar system might be “RADAR” and  
“RADAR1”.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.7  
Data Boxes  
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display.  
Up to six data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the  
default data boxes are position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground,  
speed over ground, trip log and cursor position. The user may choose which  
data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In addition,  
data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (radar, plotter,  
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see paragraph “5.5 Data  
Boxes Setup”.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
MARK  
ENTRY  
MODE  
NTH UP  
NAV  
POS  
TRIP LOG  
D.BOX  
ON /OFF  
177nm  
POSITION  
47  
58.535'N  
122  
36.496'W  
COG  
°
SOG  
°
323.6  
°
M
20.0 kt  
350.4°  
0.000 nm  
M
Data boxes  
Plotter display, showing data boxes  
1.7.1  
1.7.2  
Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key  
Radar: ZOOM & D. BOX → D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data  
box also shown/hidden)  
Plotter: D. BOX ON/OFF  
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX→D. BOX ON/OFF  
Rearranging data boxes  
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:  
1. Using the cursor pad, move the cursor to the data box you wish to move. As  
the cursor enters the box it changes to a hand. Push the [ENTER] knob, and  
the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.  
2. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the  
[ENTER] knob.  
1.7.3  
Temporarily erasing a data box  
You may temporarily erase a data box. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor  
inside the data box you wish to erase and press the [CLEAR] key. To redisplay  
the box, press the ZOOM & D.BOX soft key D.BOX soft key to display it.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.8  
Function Keys  
The function keys provide for one-touch call up of a desired function. The default  
function key settings are as shown in the table below.  
Default Setting, Key Label  
Function  
Key  
Radar  
Plotter  
Echosounder  
#1  
Track on/off, TRK  
TLL output, TLL  
Heading line on/off,  
HL  
#2  
#3  
#4  
Rings on/off, RNG  
Echo trail, TRL  
Offcenter, SFT  
Edit mark/line, EML  
Ruler, RUL  
Clutter, CLT  
Signal level, SLV  
Noise limiter, NL  
Add new waypoint,  
ADD  
#5  
Radar source, RSR  
Picture advance, PA  
Waypoint  
alphanumeric list,  
ALP  
1.8.1  
Executing a function  
1. Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to replace the preset soft key labels with the  
function key labels.  
.125nm  
SP  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU  
°M  
.250/  
319.9  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
99.9 nm  
TARGET  
H-UP  
16.0nm  
T
R
K
H
L
R
N
G
E
M
L
T
R
L
R
U
L
Function  
keys  
Function  
keys  
S
F
T
A
D
D
002WP  
FISH  
BRIDGE  
R
S
R
A
L
p
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
Radar  
Plotter  
Function keys  
2. Press function key desired.  
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the radar, plotter and  
sounder displays. For further details see the following:  
Radar: paragraph 5.2.3  
Plotter: paragraph 5.3.2  
Sounder: paragraph 5.9.4  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.9  
Simulation Display  
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration  
purposes, provides simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many  
features your unit has to offer. It allows you to view and control a simulated  
plotter, radar and sounder picture, without position-fixing equipment, network  
radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative, thus you may practice  
setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a target, etc.  
S
I
M
The simulation icon ( ) appears when any simulation mode is active.  
To start the simulation display;  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION  
SETUP soft keys in that order.  
SIM  
SETUP  
RADAR  
LIVE  
PLOTTER  
EDIT  
LIVE  
SOUNDER  
LIVE  
SPEED  
00.0kt  
COURSE  
000.0°  
LATITUDE  
45°35.000’N  
LONGITUDE  
123°00.000’W  
START DATE & TIME  
RETURN  
00:00 01.APR.01  
RADAR SIMULATION DATA  
NO  
Simulation setup menu  
3. Follow appropriate procedure shown below.  
Radar  
Internally generated echoes  
1. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.  
RADAR  
▲
SIMULATION 1  
SIMULATION 2  
LIVE  
▲
2. Select SIMULATION 1 and press the [ENTER] knob.  
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
Antenna unit-generated echoes  
1. Select RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the EDIT soft key.  
2. Select YES and push the [ENTER] knob to erase simulation data and get  
new data. The message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off display  
unit.” appears while the unit is receiving radar data.  
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found.  
Cannot get demo data.” appears. Wait one minute after the message  
disappears. Actual time may be longer depending on the system  
configuration. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not  
active. Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is  
plugged in and its signal cable is firmly fastened.  
3. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Select SIMULATION 2, then press the [ENTER] knob.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Plotter  
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.  
PLOTTER  
▲
SIMULATION  
LIVE  
▲
2. Select SIMULATION, then press the [ENTER] knob.  
3. Select SPEED and press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with the  
alphanumeric keys and push the [ENTER] knob.  
5. Select COURSE and press the EDIT key.  
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a figure-eight course,  
or enter your own course at DIRECTION. Use the cursor pad to select digit  
and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.  
7. Press the ENTER soft key.  
8. Select LATITUDE and press the EDIT soft key.  
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85°N-85°S, default setting, 45°35.000’N) and  
push the [ENTER] knob.  
10.Select LONGITUDE and press the EDIT soft key.  
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180°E-180°W, default setting, 125°00.000’W)  
and push the [ENTER] knob.  
12.Select START DATE & TIME and push the EDIT soft key.  
13.Enter start date and time and push the [ENTER] knob.  
14.Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
Sounder  
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.  
SOUNDER  
▲
SIMULATION 1  
SIMULATION 2  
LIVE  
▲
2. Select SIMULATION 1 (internally generated echoes) or SIMULATION 2  
(network sounder-generated echoes), then press the [ENTER] knob.  
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and bottom discrimination  
displays cannot be shown at SIMULATION 1 mode.  
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Automatic Radar  
Plotting) function. ARP requires connection of MODEL1833/1833C series  
network radar equipped with the ARP circuit board.  
2.1  
Radar Display  
Heading  
M: Magnetic  
T: True  
Heading line  
North marker  
Cursor  
Pulselength  
Range/  
range ring  
interval  
.125nm  
SP  
Trail time  
TRAIL 30m  
02m30s  
G1 IN  
°M  
.250  
.
/
319.9  
Trail elapsed time  
Guard zone 1  
Guard zone 2  
Echo stretch  
Presentation  
mode  
H-UP  
G2 OUT  
ES L  
Alarm icon  
Echo averaging*  
Interference rejector  
EAV L  
IR L  
Battery icon  
Guard zone 2  
Zoom area  
VRM2  
EBL1  
VRM1  
EBL2  
Guard zone 1  
Range ring  
Own ship vector*  
(ARP-equipped model,  
true vector mode)  
Zoom  
window  
* = Radar source  
Model 1833/1833C  
series radar  
EBL2  
EBL1  
VRM1  
EBL1 range  
VRM1 range  
359.9°R  
327.1°R  
27.0°R  
Cursor range  
and bearing  
(Cursor position may  
also be shown, in  
L/L or Loran C TD.)  
VRM2  
0.18nm  
0 .225nm  
0 .158nm  
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range  
Radar display  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.2  
Transmitting, Stand-by  
1. Turn the power on. The products information appears and is then followed by  
the radar screen. You can display the radar screen at once by pressing the  
any key.  
2. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.  
3. Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.  
4. When the radar picture is not required, but you want to keep it in a state of  
readiness, press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily followed by RADAR  
TX soft key.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2.3  
Tuning  
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default  
tuning method is automatic. To adjust manually or switch to automatic tuning, do  
the following:  
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.  
3. Select TUNING and press the EDIT soft key.  
TUNING  
AUTO  
MAN  
Tuning bar  
Tuning window  
4. Choose MAN or AUTO as appropriate.  
5. For manual tuning, adjust the [ENTER] knob until the tuning bar is at its  
longest position.  
6. Press the RETURN soft key.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, see the installation  
manual for how to adjust tuning.  
2.4  
Adjusting the Gain  
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner  
similar to the volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received  
signals.  
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.  
If your gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand  
excessive gain yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed  
because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise  
on the display.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
To adjust the receiver gain, transmit on long range, and then do the following:  
1. Press the [GAIN] key. The last-used “adjustment window” is displayed. In the  
example below, the gain sensitivity adjustment is shown.  
Item selected for adjustment is highlighted.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
.125nm  
SP  
M
°
GAIN  
ADJUST  
°
GAIN  
ADJUST  
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
H-UP  
GAIN  
GAIN  
A/C  
SEA  
A/C  
SEA  
A/C  
RAIN  
A/C  
RAIN  
A/C AT  
ON/OFF  
FTC  
RETURN  
RETURN  
GAIN SENSITIVITY  
GAIN SENSITIVITY  
AUTO ROUGH  
AUTO MODERATE  
AUTO CALM  
AUTO ROUGH  
AUTO MODERATE  
AUTO CALM  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
+
MAN  
0
MAN  
0
MODEL 1722/1722C/1723C series  
MODEL 1833/C series  
Gain adjustment soft keys  
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press the GAIN soft key to  
show it.  
GAIN SENSITIVITY  
AUTO ROUGH  
AUTO MODERATE  
AUTO CALM  
MAN  
0
Gain sensitivity window  
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or  
MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea  
state.  
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of  
adjustment is 0-100.  
5. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.5  
Reducing Sea Clutter  
2.5.1  
How the A/C SEA works  
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display  
with random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher  
the antenna is above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter  
may affect radar performance because real targets are sometimes hidden by the  
echoes of small waves. (See the left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea  
clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C SEA to reduce the clutter.  
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter  
is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases,  
so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.  
Sea clutter at  
screen center  
A/C SEA adjusted;  
sea clutter suppressed  
Effect of A/C SEA  
2.5.2  
Adjusting A/C SEA  
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and  
small targets become distinguishable.  
1. Press the [GAIN] key.  
2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.  
A/C SEA  
AUTO ROUGH  
AUTO MODERATE  
AUTO CALM  
A/C SEA  
0
MAN  
0
Model 1722/1722C/1723C  
series radar  
Model 1833/C series radar  
A/C SEA setting window  
3. When the radar source is the Model 1722/1722C/1723C series radar,  
press ▲ or ▼ to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or  
MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to sea state.  
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust while observing  
radar echoes. The range of adjustment is 0-100. Do not overadjust the A/C  
SEA – weak target echoes may be missed.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
5. When the radar source is the Model 1833/C series radar, A/C SEA and  
A/C RAIN can be automatically adjusted. Press the A/C AT soft key to select  
ON or OFF as appropriate. When turned on, it overrides A/C SEA and A/C  
RAIN settings.  
6. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.  
2.6  
Reducing Precipitation Clutter  
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even  
when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain  
clutter (rain, snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation  
clutter shows as random dots on the screen.  
2.6.1  
Adjusting the A/C RAIN  
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN. This  
split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of  
solid targets easier.  
1. Press the [GAIN] key.  
2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.  
A/C RAIN  
0
A/C RAIN setting window  
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust the A/C RAIN affect. The current level is  
shown on the A/C RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of  
adjustment is 0 to 100. Do not overadjust the A/C RAIN – weak target echoes  
may be missed.  
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.6.2  
Adjusting the FTC  
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the  
FTC. The FTC splits up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making  
recognition of solid targets easier.  
Note:In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to  
clarify the picture when navigating in confined waters. However, with the  
circuit active the receiver is less sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by  
setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.  
FTC is available when the radar source is the MODEL1722/1723C series radar.  
1. Press the [GAIN] key.  
2. Press the FTC soft key to show the FTC window.  
FTC  
0
FTC setting window  
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100. Do not  
overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.  
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.7  
Range Scale  
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will  
appear on your display. in addition, the range setting will also automatically  
adjust the range ring interval so that accurate range measurements may be  
made while operating on any range setting.  
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner  
of the display.  
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.  
Range scales (nm, sm)  
Range  
0.125  
0.25  
0.5  
0.75  
1
1.5  
2
3
1
4
1
6
2
8
2
12 16 24 36  
48  
12  
64 72  
16 18  
Ring  
0.0625 0.125  
0.125  
0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5  
3
4
6
12  
Interval  
No. of  
Rings  
2
2
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
Range scales (km)  
Range  
0.25  
0.5  
0.75  
1
1.5  
2
3
1
4
1
6
2
8
2
12 16 24 36 48 64  
72  
18  
Ring  
0.125 0.25  
0.25  
0.25 0.5 0.5  
3
4
6
12 12 16  
Interval  
No. of  
Rings  
2
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.  
Model 1722, 1722C, 1723C: 24 nm  
Model 1732, 1732C, 1742, 1742C, 1752, 1752C, 1733C,  
1753C, 1833, 1833C: 36 nm  
Model 1762, 1762C, 1763C, 1933, 1933C: 48 nm  
Model 1943, 1943C: 64 nm  
Model 1953C: 72 nm  
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP  
menu. For details see paragraph 5.2.2.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.8  
Pulselength  
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display.  
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you  
are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current  
pulselength setting, however, it is possible to change it for the 1.5 and 3 nm (sm)  
ranges (3 and 6 kilometer ranges) as below. Generally, select a longer pulse for  
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.  
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse  
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Middle pulse, long pulse  
1. Press [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Set the range to 1.5 or 3 nm, whichever you want to set.  
3. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.  
.500nm  
SP  
M
SIGNAL  
PROCESS  
°
1.5/  
319.9  
H-UP  
I. REJ  
LOW  
E. AVG  
OFF  
Shown when radar  
source is the Model  
1833/C series  
network radar. Not  
shown otherwise.  
PULSE  
SHORT  
E. STR  
LOW  
RETURN  
359.9  
1.40nm  
°R  
+
Signal process soft keys  
4. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or  
MEDIUM for 1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm, 6  
km.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.9  
Presentation Mode  
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up  
and true motion.  
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up. (When you use the  
network radar, input the radar source.)  
2.9.1  
Selecting a presentation mode  
1. Press [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.  
.125nm  
SP  
.125nm  
SP  
M
M
RADAR  
RADAR  
°
°
Current  
mode  
setting  
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
H-UP  
H-UP  
MODE  
HD UP  
MODE  
HD UP  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
RINGS  
RINGS  
ON /OFF  
MED  
HL  
HL  
OFF  
OFF  
RETURN  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
+
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Radar display soft keys  
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation  
mode and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up,  
True Motion, Head-up, and Course-up.  
Mode name  
North up  
Indicator on display  
N-UP  
Soft key label  
NTH UP  
TRUE M  
HD UP  
True motion  
Head up  
TR-M  
H-UP  
Course up  
CSE UP  
CSE UP  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
Note:When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to  
head-up, the heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the  
audio alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key to acknowledge the alarm.  
The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears. Restore compass  
signal to show heading indication. Use the MODE soft key to select  
presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the  
[CLEAR] key.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.9.2  
Description of presentation modes  
Head-up  
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line connecting the center  
with the top of the display indicates own ship’s heading. The targets are painted  
at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.  
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.  
Heading Line  
North Marker  
Head-up presentation mode  
Course-up  
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at  
the top of the screen. As you change heading, the ship’s heading marker moves.  
If you select a new course, the picture resets to display the new course at the  
top of the display.  
North Marker  
Heading Line  
Course-up presentation mode  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
North-up  
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their measured distances and in  
their true (compass) directions from own ship. North is maintained at the top of  
the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ship’s  
heading.  
North  
Heading Line  
North-up presentation mode  
True motion  
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen, while your own  
ship moves across the radar image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like  
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in true perspective to each  
other and to fixed landmasses. As your ship’s position approaches the edge of  
the screen, the radar display is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of  
your ship. You can manually reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing  
the RADAR DISPLAY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft key.  
North  
Heading Line  
True motion presentation mode  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.10 Measuring the Range  
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by  
the cursor, and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).  
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings  
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target.  
Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner  
edge of the nearest ring.  
To turn the range rings on, do the following:  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.  
.125nm  
SP  
.125nm  
SP  
M
M
RADAR  
RADAR  
°
°
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
H-UP  
H-UP  
MODE  
MODE  
HD UP  
HD UP  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
RINGS  
RINGS  
ON /OFF  
MED  
HL  
HL  
OFF  
OFF  
RETURN  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
+
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Radar display soft keys  
3. Press the RINGS soft key to select ON (MODEL1722 series) or desired  
brilliance (MODEL1722C/1723C series) among LOW, MED and HIGH.  
To disappear rings, select OFF.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor  
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the  
radar target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right  
of “+” at the bottom of the display.  
Target  
.125nm  
SP  
M
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
SIGNAL  
PROC.  
Cursor  
RADAR  
DISPLY  
NAV  
FUNC  
TARGET  
ZOOM &  
D. BOX  
4.3  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
Bearing and range from own  
ship to cursor position  
How to measure range and bearing to a target with the cursor  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM  
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
EBL  
VRM  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
EBL1  
ON  
VRM1  
ON  
OFFSET  
EBL2  
ON  
VRM2  
ON  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
EBL/VRM soft keys  
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft  
key to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom  
of the screen, is highlighted.  
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob the place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar  
target. Read the VRM indication to find range to the target.  
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
EBL  
VRM  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
EBL1  
ON  
VRM1  
ON  
VRM1  
OFFSET  
(Dotted line)  
EBL2  
ON  
VRM2  
(Dashed line)  
VRM2  
ON  
EBL2  
VRM2  
EBL1  
VRM1  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
---.-°R  
---.-°R  
+
VRM1 range  
0.242nm  
0.119nm  
Active marker is highlighted.  
VRM2 range  
How to measure range with the VRM  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication  
Press appropriate VRM soft key and press the [CLEAR] key. The VRM is erased,  
and its indication becomes blank.  
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes  
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish  
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.  
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes  
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the  
EBL/VRM data boxes.  
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes  
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target that you need to see, you can  
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the  
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.  
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to erase the EBL/VRM soft keys if shown.  
2. Using the cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.  
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,  
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.  
3. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the  
[ENTER] knob.  
2.11 Measuring the Bearing  
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the  
EBL (Electronic bearing Line).  
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor  
Use the cursor pad to locate the cursor to the center of the target The bearing to  
the target appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner  
on the screen, next to the “+” mark.  
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL  
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key.  
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key  
to select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the  
screen, is highlighted.  
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the  
EBL indication to find the bearing to the target  
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
.125nm  
SP  
M
EBL  
VRM  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
EBL1  
ON  
EBL1  
(Dotted line)  
VRM1  
ON  
OFFSET  
EBL2  
ON  
EBL2  
(Dashed line)  
VRM2  
ON  
EBL2 bearing  
EBL1  
EBL2  
VRM2  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
EBL1 bearing  
R: Relative  
T: True  
330.1°R  
234.1°R  
+
VRM1  
-.---nm  
-.---nm  
Active marker is highlighted.  
How to measure bearing with the EBL  
Note: Bearing can be shown Relative to ship’s heading (relative) or in reference  
to North (True). This setting may be changed by changing the EBL  
REFERENCE setting, which is in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.  
See the paragraph “5.2.1 Radar display setup.”  
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication  
Press appropriate EBL soft key and press the [CLEAR] key. The EBL is erased  
and its indication becomes blank.  
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes  
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish  
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.  
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes  
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the  
EBL/VRM data boxes.  
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes  
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target that you need to see, you can  
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the  
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.  
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to erase the EBL/VRM soft keys if appears.  
2. Using the cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.  
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,  
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.  
3. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the  
[ENTER] knob.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker  
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. The  
heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar  
display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up  
mode; it changes its orientation depending on the ship orientation in north-up,  
course-up and true motion modes.  
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up  
modes the north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading  
moves.  
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR  
DISPLY soft key followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay  
the markers.  
2.13 Reducing Noise  
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as  
follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.  
3. Select NOISE REJECTION and press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Select OFF, HIGH or LOW as appropriate.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.14 Reducing Radar Interference  
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is  
operating in the same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance  
looks like many bright dots either scattered at random or in the form of dotted  
lines extending from the center to the edge of the display. Interference effects  
are distinguishable from normal echoes because they do not appear in the same  
place on successive rotations of the scanner.  
Be sure to turn off the interference rejection circuit when no interference exists –  
weak targets may be missed.  
Radar interference  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.  
.500nm  
SP  
M
SIGNAL  
PROCESS  
°
1.5/  
319.9  
H-UP  
I. REJ  
LOW  
E. AVG  
OFF  
Shown when radar  
source is the Model  
1833/C series  
network radar. Not  
shown otherwise.  
PULSE  
SHORT  
E. STR  
LOW  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
Signal process soft keys  
3. Press the I. REJ soft key to choose the interference rejection level desired;  
LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the  
interference rejecter is on.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.15 Zoom  
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the  
zoom circle, which appears at the bottom right- or left-hand corner on the display.  
The zoom feature is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and  
when the display is shifted.  
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM D. BOX soft keys.  
3. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A solid circle, called the  
“zoom circle,” appears on the display.  
4. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor where you want to zoom.  
5. Press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key to fix the zoom cursor position. (The  
solid circle changes to a dashed one.)  
6. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The dashed  
circle changes to a solid one.) Relocate the zoom cursor, then press the  
CURSOR LOCK key.  
7. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
ZOOM  
D. BOX  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
ZOOM  
ON /OFF  
Zoom circle  
CURSOR  
FLOAT  
ARPA  
TGT ZM  
Requires optional  
ARP Board in  
1833/1833C series  
network radar.  
Not shown when  
radar source is  
otherwise.  
D. BOX  
ON/OFF  
Zoom window  
RETURN  
001.0  
0.160nm  
°R  
+
Zoom  
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets  
You may zoom in on TTM targets coming into the display. TTM targets can come  
from a NAVNET connected RADAR, or from other ARP RADAR that is outputting  
the TTM message. Note: TTM stands for Tracked Target Message. It is a NMEA  
0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP capable RADAR.  
TTM target numbers must be displayed to zoom in on tracked targets. This can  
be done by enabling the target ID number option in the ARP setup menu.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the ZOOM/D.BOX soft key to show ZOOM D.BOX soft keys.  
3. Press the ZOOM soft key to select ZOOM ON.  
4. Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.  
SELECT TARGET NO.  
▲
1
▲
Target no. selection window  
5. Use the [ENTER] knob to select number (1-10) and then push the [ENTER]  
knob. If the target does not exist several beep sounds and the zoom function  
is cancelled.  
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.  
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background  
color for the radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see change the  
background color.  
2.16 Shifting the Picture  
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically  
to expand the view field without switching to a larger scale.  
2.16.1 Manual shift  
The sweep origin can be shifted in any presentation mode to a point specified by  
the cursor by up to 60% of the range in use in any direction.  
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.  
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
3. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.  
4. Press the SHIFT soft key.  
5. Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor  
location. SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.  
6. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
7. To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys in that  
order.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
SHIFT  
Cursor  
Place cursor  
where desired.  
Press the MANUAL soft key.  
Shifting the picture manually  
2.16.2 Automatic shift  
In the head-up mode, the amount of shift is automatically calculated with speed.  
The maximum shift amount is limited to 60% of the range in use. For example, if  
you set the shift speed setting for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots,  
the amount of shift will be 40%. The formula for determining shift amount is as  
shown below.  
Ship's speed  
X 0.6 = Amount of shift(%)  
Shift speed setting  
Setting automatic shift maximum speed  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.  
3. Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.  
4. Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship speed setting  
window.  
AUTO SHIP SPEED  
15  
Auto ship speed setting window  
5. Adjust the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob to set the maximum speed of your  
vessel and then push the [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The  
setting range is 1-999 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.  
Automatic shift  
Press the AUTO key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift,  
press the RADAR DISPLAY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.17 Using the Offset EBL  
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course, and can also  
be used to measure the range and bearing between two targets.  
2.17.1 Predicting a collision course  
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a collision  
course with your vessel.  
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.  
2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.  
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position  
and an “X” appears at the cursor position.  
4. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it  
might be on a collision course with own ship.  
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to fix the origin position.  
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the [ENTER]  
knob so the EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks  
along the EBL towards the center of the display (your ship’s position), the  
target may be on a collision course.  
7. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
EBL  
VRM  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
EBL1  
ON  
VRM1  
ON  
Target tracked  
here  
OFFSET  
Initial target  
position  
EBL2  
ON  
VRM2  
ON  
EBL1  
VRM1  
359.9  
.0.240nm  
°R  
45.0°R  
+
-.---nm  
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets  
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing  
between two targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an  
example.  
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target “A”.  
2. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.  
3. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.  
4. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 and VRM1 moves to the  
cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”  
5. Rotate the [ENTER] knob so the EBL bisects the target “B”.  
6. Press the [ENTER] knob.  
7. Press the VRM1 ON soft key and then rotate the [ENTER] knob to place the  
VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B”.  
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing  
between the two targets.  
9. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET key.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
EBL  
VRM  
°
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
EBL1  
ON  
VRM1  
ON  
Target B  
Target A  
OFFSET  
EBL2  
ON  
VRM2  
ON  
EBL1  
VRM1  
Bearing and range  
between target A  
and target B  
359.9°R  
0.24nm  
45.0°R  
+
0.125nm  
Measuring range and bearing between two targets  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.18 Echo Trails  
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their past  
movements relative to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past  
possible collision situations.  
Echo trail  
Sample echo trails  
2.18.1 Trail time  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET soft key.  
3. Press the TRAIL soft key.  
.125nm  
SP  
.125nm  
SP  
M
M
°
°
TRAIL  
TRAIL  
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
H-UP  
TRAIL  
ON /OFF  
TRAIL  
ON /OFF  
TRAIL  
TIME  
TRAIL  
TIME  
BRILL  
HIGH  
GRAD  
SINGLE  
TRAIL  
COLOR  
RETURN  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
+
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Trail soft keys  
4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.  
TRAIL TIME  
▲
15 seconds  
30 seconds  
1 minute  
3 minutes  
6 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
CONTINUOUS  
▲
Trail time window  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
5. Use the cursor pad to select time desired.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key to finish.  
2.18.2 Starting echo trails  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.  
3. Press the TRAIL ON/OFF to select ON.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.  
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top  
right-hand corner of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets.  
Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed, and zoom or shift is  
turned on.  
For continuous trails the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59  
seconds. When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time  
display resets to zero and trail begins again.  
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 3 n  
the above procedure.  
Note: No echo trails are shown where a tx sector blanking area is set.  
2.18.3 Trail brilliance (MODEL1722 series)  
Trail brilliance can be selected to high or low as below.  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.  
3. Press the BRILL soft key to select HIGH or LOW.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.  
2.18.4 Trail gradation (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation  
paints the trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.  
3. Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.  
Multitone  
Monotone  
Multitone and monotone trails  
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.18.5 Trail color (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
The MODEL1722C/1723C series may be shown echo trails in blue, yellow,  
green or white.  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys.  
TRAIL COLOR  
▲
BLUE  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
WHITE  
▲
Trail color window  
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.  
4. Press the ENTER soft key.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.19 Echo Stretch  
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as  
weaker and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s  
internal circuitry. The echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all  
ranges. Two types of echo stretch are available: ES LOW which stretches  
echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both range  
and bearing directions.  
Target  
Range  
direction  
Bearing  
Bearing  
direction  
direction  
Echo Stretch OFF  
"LOW" Echo stretch  
"HIGH" Echo stretch  
Types of echo stretch  
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar  
interference. For this reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are  
properly suppressed before activating the echo stretch.  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.  
3. Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.20 Echo Averaging  
The echo average feature, available with selection of a Model 1833/C series  
network radar as radar source, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes  
received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the  
same position during every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable  
echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.  
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs  
scan-to-scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo  
signals over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is  
presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans  
resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets  
from sea clutter.  
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress  
sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.  
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.  
OFF: No averaging  
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance  
of unstable echoes.  
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.  
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.  
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.  
(a) Echo average OFF  
(b) Echo average ON  
Effect of echo averaging  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.21 Outputting TLL Data  
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their  
plotter screen, with the waypoint mark. This function requires position and  
heading data.  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target whose position you  
wish to output.  
3. Press the TARGET soft key.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
°
.250/  
319.9  
TARGET  
H-UP  
TRAIL  
TLL  
OUTPUT  
Shown with selection of  
1833/C series network  
radar equipped with ARP  
function as source.  
ACQ  
TARGET  
INFO  
Not shown otherwise.  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
TARGET soft keys  
4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when  
receiving TLL from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore  
normal operation.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.22 Guard Alarm  
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a  
guard zone. When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an  
audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to call the operator’s  
attention.  
CAUTION  
• The alarm should not be relied upon as  
the sole means for detecting possible  
collision situations.  
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls  
should be properly adjusted to be sure  
the alarm system does not overlook  
target echoes.  
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone  
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:  
1. Press the [ALARM] key.  
2. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner)  
of the guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET  
GUARD2 soft key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.  
3. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left  
corner) of the guard zone area and push the [ENTER] knob.  
4. Press RETURN soft key to finish.  
.125nm  
SP  
.125nm  
SP  
M
M
ALARM  
GUARD 1  
°
°
ALARM  
.250/  
319.9  
.250/  
319.9  
H-UP  
H-UP  
SET  
SET  
GUARD1  
GUARD1  
ERASE  
GUARD1  
2
1
SET  
SET  
GUARD2  
GUARD2  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MOVE +CURSOR TO  
NO ALARM  
317.2  
0.230nm  
°
R
39.9°R  
.0.230nm  
ANOTHER CORNER OF  
GUARD1 AND PUSH KNOB  
TO SET.  
+
+
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)  
corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER]  
knob.  
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner  
for guard zone and press the SET  
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key.  
How to set a guard alarm zone  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine the  
guard alarm type. If a target is found inside the guard zone the guard zone type  
becomes an “Outward guard alarm”, and any target exiting, the guard zone will  
trigger an alarm. If no target is found the guard zone type becomes an “Inward  
guard alarm”, and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the alarm. The  
guard alarm type is shown as G1 (G2) IN or G1(G2) OUT.  
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range, ”G1 (G2) IN” or  
“G1 (G2) OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is  
not available while this indication appears.  
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the  
guard alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the  
radar is set to transmit again.  
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…  
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and  
the alarm icon appears (red on the color model). Additionally the message  
“TARGET ENTERED INTO GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM  
GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, depending on the  
guard zone type. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm.  
2.22.3 Canceling the guard alarm  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.  
3. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.23 Watchman  
2.23.1 How watchman works  
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to  
check for targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is  
cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no  
target is found the radar goes into standby, for the number of minutes selected  
on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This feature is useful when you do not  
need the radar’s function continuously but want to be alerted to radar targets in a  
specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when Watchman is active.  
*
*
ST-BY  
Tx  
Tx  
ST-BY  
5,10  
1 min  
1 min  
5,10  
or  
or  
20 min  
20 min  
Watchman  
starts  
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.  
How watchman works  
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.  
3. Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.  
4. Press RETURN soft key to finish.  
Note:When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the  
message “PLEASE SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO  
CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then set a guard zone.  
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval  
The watchman standby period interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar  
is in standby, can be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.  
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME and press the EDIT soft key.  
WATCHMAN TIME  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
20 minutes  
Watchman window  
4. Select time desired and press the ENTER soft key.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.24 Waypoint Marker  
A waypoint marker, showing waypoint position output from a navigation device,  
may be inscribed on the radar display. You may show or hide this marker as  
desired.  
.125nm  
SP  
M
NAV  
°
.250/  
Waypoint  
319.9  
FUNC  
UP  
W. MAN  
ON/OFF  
marker  
+
WPT MK  
ON /OFF  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.24nm  
°R  
+
Waypoint marker  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.  
3. Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25 ARP (option), TTM operation  
When the radar source is ARP-equipped Model 1833/C series network radar,  
you can manually and automatically acquire and track 10 targets. Once a target  
is acquired automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32  
nm. When the FURUNO heading sensor PG-1000 is connected, RMC sentence  
(NMEA) is required for true heading data.  
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data  
sentence “TTM” through the NETWORK or NMEA port. However, targets cannot  
be acquired.  
Usage precautions for ARP  
CAUTION  
The plotting accuracy and response of  
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.  
Tracking accuracy is affected by the  
following:  
WARNING  
No one navigational aid should be relied  
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.  
The navigator has the responsibility to  
check all aids available to confirm  
position. Electronic aids are not  
a substitute for basic navigational  
principles and common sense.  
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course  
change. One to two minutes is required to  
restore vectors to full accuracy after an  
abrupt course change. (The actual  
amount depends on gyrocompass  
specifications.)  
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely  
proportional to the relative speed of the  
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30  
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60  
seconds for low relative speed.  
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an  
automatically or manually acquired radar  
target and calculates its course and  
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since  
the data generated by the auto plotter  
are based on what radar targets are  
selected, the radar must always be  
optimally tuned for use with the auto  
plotter, to ensure required targets will not  
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea  
returns and noise will not be acquired  
and tracked.  
Display accuracy is affected by the  
following:  
• Echo intensity  
• A target does not always mean a land-  
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels  
but can imply returns from sea surface  
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes  
with environment, the operator should  
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN  
and GAIN controls to be sure target  
echoes are not eliminated from the  
radar screen.  
• Radar transmission pulsewidth  
• Radar bearing error  
• Gyrocompass error  
• Course change (own ship or target)  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP  
SETUP menu.  
ARP  
SETUP  
ARP TARGET INFO  
INTERNAL ARP  
EDIT  
CANCEL ALL TARGETS  
NO  
ARP VECTOR MODE  
TRUE  
ARP VECTOR TIME  
30 minutes  
HISTORY INTERVAL  
OFF  
CPA  
OFF  
TCPA  
30 seconds  
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA  
OFF  
RETURN  
TARGET ID NUMBER  
OFF  
ARP setup menu  
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the  
ARP target info window.  
ARP TARGET INFO  
▲
INTERNAL ARP  
EXTERNAL ARP  
OFF  
▲
ARP target info window  
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.  
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be the MODEL1833/C series radar.  
Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.  
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NETWORK or NMEA port.  
Target tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.  
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.  
4. Press the ENTER soft key.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP only)  
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you  
attempt to acquire an eleventh target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY  
TRACKING 10 TARGETS!” appears for five seconds. To acquire another target,  
terminate tracking of an unnecessary target as shown in the paragraph 2.25.4.  
Manual acquisition  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
2. Press the TARGET soft key.  
3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire and press the ACQ soft key.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key.  
The plot symbol changes its shape according to its status as below. A vector  
appears about one minute after acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.  
Vector  
01*  
01*  
01*  
Target Number  
At acquisition  
1 min. after  
acquisition  
3 min. after  
acquisition  
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is  
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.  
ARP plot symbols  
Automatic acquisition  
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets automatically by setting an automatic  
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is selected after acquiring targets  
manually, only the remaining capacity for targets may be automatically acquired.  
For example, if seven targets have been manually acquired, three targets may  
be automatically acquired.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.  
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.  
3. Operate the cursor pad to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.  
AUTO ACQ. AREA  
▲
OFF  
ON  
▲
Automatic acquisition area window  
5. Select ON.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5  
miles in range and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.  
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously  
tracked when switching to manual acquisition.  
Automatic acquisition area  
45° starboard  
45° port  
2.0 - 2.5 nm  
Automatic acquisition area  
2.25.3 Displaying target number (internal, external ARP)  
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.  
.125nm  
SP  
T
°
.250/  
319.9  
TARGET  
H-UP  
TRAIL  
TLL  
OUTPUT  
01  
ACQ  
ARP  
Target  
Number  
TARGET  
INFO  
RETURN  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
ARP target number  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key.  
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key.  
5. Select ON or OFF (default setting) as appropriate.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets  
When 10 targets have been acquired, no more targets may be acquired unless  
targets are cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first  
cancel one or more individual targets, or all of the targets, using one of the  
procedures below.  
Terminating tracking of selected targets  
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.  
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase to terminate tracking and erase the target.  
Terminating tracking of all targets  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.  
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key.  
CANCEL ALL TARGETS  
▲
YES  
NO  
▲
Cancel all targets window  
4. Select YES.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)  
What is a vector?  
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows speed and course  
of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the  
selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length in order  
to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.  
Vector  
Vector  
Vector reference, vector time  
You may reference the vectors to North (True) or ship’s heading (relative) as  
desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30 minutes.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP  
SETUP menu.  
2. Operate the cursor pad to select ARP VECTOR MODE.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the vector mode window.  
ARP VECTOR MODE  
RELATIVE  
TRUE  
Vector mode window  
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the  
ARP vector time window.  
ARP VECTOR TIME  
▲
30 seconds  
1 minute  
3 minutes  
6 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
▲
ARP vector time window  
7. Operate the cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6  
min, 15 min and 30 min.  
8. Press the ENTER soft key.  
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.6 Displaying past position display (ARP)  
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum 10 dots) marking the past  
positions of any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the  
spacing between dots. Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.  
(a) Ship turning  
(b) Ship running  
straight  
(d) Ship increased  
speed  
(c) Ship reduced  
speed  
Past position displays  
To turn the past position display on or off:  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.  
2. Operate the cursor pad to select HISTORY INTERVAL.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the plot interval window.  
HISTORY INTERVAL  
▲
OFF  
30 seconds  
1 minute  
3 minutes  
6 minutes  
▲
History interval window  
4. Operate the cursor pad to select plotting interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min  
and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data  
This ARP calculates motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and  
TCPA) of all target been tracked. You can show this data for a tracked target as  
below. TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on to  
show ARP target data.  
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.  
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.  
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected  
target appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM  
data box is displayed the ARP data box will be under it.)  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
5. To erase the ARP target data box, select the corresponding target with the  
cursor and press the [CLEAR] key.  
.125nm  
SP  
T
°
.250/  
319.9  
TARGET  
H-UP  
TRAIL  
+
Cursor  
TLL  
OUTPUT  
ACQ  
ARP  
Target  
01  
TARGET  
INFO  
RETURN  
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min  
CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt  
CPA 2nm TCPA 12.35  
359.9  
0.240nm  
°R  
+
CPA and TCPA  
Course and Speed  
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time  
ARP target data  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)  
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm  
range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm  
sounds, which you may silence with the [CLEAR] key. In addition, the target plot  
symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes together with its  
vector. Press the [ALARM] key and the message COLLISION ALARM appears.  
Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the  
triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the  
target. The ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point  
of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each target to own ship.  
Provided that this feature is used correctly, it will help prevent the risk of collision  
by alerting you to threatening targets. It is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C  
RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so  
that it can track targets effectively.  
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the  
size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.  
CAUTION  
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be  
relied upon as the sole means for detect-  
ing the risk of collision. The navigator is  
not relieved of the responsibility to keep  
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,  
whether or not the radar or other plotting  
aid is in use.  
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.  
2. Operate the cursor pad to select CPA.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.  
CPA  
▲
OFF  
0.5nm  
1nm  
2nm  
3nm  
5nm  
6nm  
▲
CPA window  
4. Select a CPA limit desired by the cursor pad.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu reappears.  
6. Press the cursor pad to select TCPA.  
7. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
TCPA  
▲
▲
30 seconds  
1 minute  
2 minutes  
3 minutes  
4 minutes  
5 minutes  
6 minutes  
12 minutes  
TCPA window  
8. Select a TCPA limit.  
9. Press the ENTER soft key.  
10.Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)  
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond  
and tracking is discontinued after one minute.  
1
Lost target mark  
Canceling a lost target  
1. Place the cursor on the target.  
2. Press the [CLEAR] key.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display  
2.26.1 General  
Minimum and maximum ranges  
Minimum range  
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of  
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate  
from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the  
pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang  
suppression and digital quantization.  
Maximum range  
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably  
depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the  
waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of  
the target, and atmospheric conditions.  
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar  
horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by  
about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. Rmax is given  
in the following equation.  
Rmax= 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )  
where  
Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)  
h1:  
h2:  
antenna height (m)  
target height (m)  
Radar horizon  
Optical horizon  
Radar horizon  
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the  
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;  
Rmax= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm  
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which  
absorbs the radar signal).  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
Radar resolution  
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing  
resolution and range resolution.  
Bearing resolution  
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display the  
echoes received from two targets, which are at the same range and close  
together, as separate targets. Bearing resolution is directly proportional to the  
antenna length, and inversely proportional to the radar's wavelength.  
Range resolution  
Range resolution is the ability to display the echoes received  
from two targets, which are on the same bearing and close to each other, as  
separate targets.  
Bearing accuracy  
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of  
a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically  
depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually  
taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading  
marker at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To  
minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, select a range which will  
put the target as far out to the edge of the radar screen as possible.  
Range measurement  
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the  
radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings  
and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the  
screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range  
to a target. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so  
that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to  
obtain more accurate range measurements.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.26.2 False echoes  
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no  
target, or disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be  
recognized, however, if you understand why they are displayed. Typical false  
echoes are shown below.  
Multiple echoes  
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a  
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be  
observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of  
the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often  
removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the [A/C SEA]  
control.  
True  
echo  
Target  
Own ship  
Multiple  
echo  
Multiple echoes  
Sidelobe echoes  
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side  
of the beam. This stray RF is called sidelobe. If a target exists where it can be  
detected by the side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be  
represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Sidelobes appear  
usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced  
through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA  
control.  
Target A  
Target B  
Target B  
(True)  
(Spurious)  
Sidelobe echoes  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
Virtual image  
A relatively large target close to your ship may be shown at two positions on the  
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other  
is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close  
to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large  
metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the  
screen.  
Target ship  
Own  
ship  
True  
echo  
Mirror image  
of target ship  
False  
echo  
Virtual image  
Shadow sectors  
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar  
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a  
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced. Within this sector, targets  
can not be detected.  
Radar  
antenna  
Radar  
mast  
Shadow sector  
Shadow sectors  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
2.26.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)  
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3  
cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received  
causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete  
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through  
the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band  
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve  
complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match  
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.  
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow  
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots  
equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.  
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may  
show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional  
dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed  
with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller  
than the original dots.  
Screen B:When SART  
is close  
Screen A:When SART  
is distant  
Lines of 12 dots  
are displayed in  
concentric arcs.  
Radar antenna  
beamwidth  
Echo of SART  
24 NM  
Echo of  
SART  
1.5 NM  
Position of  
SART  
Own ship's  
position  
Own ship's  
position  
Position of  
SART  
SART mark  
length  
Radar receiver  
bandwidth  
9500 MHz  
9200 MHz  
Sweep time  
7.5 µs  
95 µs  
Low speed sweep signal  
High speed sweep signal  
Sweep start  
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
General procedure for detecting SART response  
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART  
responses is about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.  
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).  
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.  
General remarks on receiving SART  
SART range errors  
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the  
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is  
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.  
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first  
of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.  
Radar bandwidth  
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with  
the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz  
are used with long pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with  
short pulses on short ranges.  
Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly,  
so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of  
the SART.  
Radar side lobes  
As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna may show the  
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed  
by the use of the [A/C SEA] control although it may be operationally useful to  
observe the sidelobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and  
also they will confirm that the SART is near to the ship.  
Gain  
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range  
detection should be used, that is, with background noise speckle visible.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. RADAR OPERATION  
A/C SEA control  
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum.  
Care should be exercised as wanted target in sea clutter may be obscured. Note  
also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be  
detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case,  
the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 nm from the  
furthest dot back towards own ship.  
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities in which case  
the operator should switch to manual.  
A/C RAIN control  
This should be used normally (to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a  
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the  
anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that racon responses, which are often in the form  
of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.  
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities in which case  
the operator should switch to manual.  
Note: This SART information is excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 Operation of  
Marine Radar for SART Detection.  
2.26.4 Racon (Radar Beacon)  
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered  
by a ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted  
on the same frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is  
superimposed on the ship's radar display automatically.  
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just  
beyond the position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure  
below) displayed radially from just beyond the beacon.  
Racon  
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.1 Plotter Displays  
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen  
(MODEL1722C/1723C series), or in a combination screen. Press the [DISP] key  
to show the screen selection window, and then rotate the [ENTER] knob to  
select PLOT, NAV or OVRLY (overlay) as appropriate.  
3.1.1  
Full-screen plotter display  
Presentation mode  
(North-up)  
Nav data window  
(Data changes with NAV soft  
key setting and cursor  
Trip distance  
status. For details see next page.)  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
M
TRIP NU  
99.9 nm  
16.0nm  
Scale  
MARK  
ENTRY  
S
I
M
MODE  
NTH UP  
Icon (from left)  
North Marker  
Chart  
NAV  
POS  
Functions for  
soft keys  
Alarm  
Track Hold  
Chart Offset  
Save  
L/L Offset  
Battery  
002WP  
D. BOX  
ON/OFF  
FISH  
BRIDGE  
Simulation  
(See icon  
table on  
page A-14  
for details.)  
Own ship  
marker  
Waypoint name  
Course bar  
Waypoint marker  
Own ship  
track  
Full-screen plotter display  
Note: The own ship marker blinks when the unit loses the GPS signal. The  
message “No GPS fix!” appears approx. 90 seconds after the positioning  
error and is accompanied by the audio alarm. When the message “NO  
POSITION DATA” appears, a cable may be loosened.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Nav data window  
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft  
key and the cursor.  
Presentation  
Mode  
Latitude, Longitude  
Bearing to Cursor  
Latitude and longitude  
of cursor intersection  
34°24. 3456'N  
359. 9°M  
TRIP  
99. 9nm  
NU  
+
124°24. 3456'W  
59.9nm  
Cursor Mark  
Trip Distance  
Range to  
Cursor  
Presentation  
Mode  
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint  
Course  
Waypoint data  
(waypoint selected  
with cursor)  
359. 9°M 359. 9°  
NU  
19. 9nm 19. 9ktM 99T.R9IPnm  
001WPT  
Waypoint Mark  
Range to Waypoint Speed  
Trip Distance  
Presentation  
Mode  
Own ship  
position  
NAV  
POS  
Latitude, Longitude  
Course  
34°24. 3456'N  
359. 9°M TRIP  
NU  
soft key  
124°24. 3456'W  
19. 9kt 99. 9nm  
Own Ship Mark  
Speed  
Trip Distance  
Time-to-Go  
to Destination  
Destination  
waypoint  
data  
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint  
NAV  
WPT  
Presentation  
Mode  
359. 9°M TTG4D02H23M NU  
001WPT  
soft key  
19. 9nm ETA1st 13:45  
Waypoint Mark  
Estimated Time of  
Arrival  
Range to Waypoint  
Presentation  
Mode  
Bearing to Waypoint  
Own ship  
speed and  
course  
Course, Speed  
NAV  
S/C  
CSE  
BRG  
RNG  
M
TMP  
DPT  
359. 9°  
359. 9 °  
79. 9°F  
345 ft  
NU  
soft key  
SOG  
19. 9kt  
99. 9nm  
* Requires appropriate  
sensor.  
Water Temp.,  
Depth*  
Range  
to  
Turns off  
nav data  
window  
Waypoint  
NAV  
OFF  
soft key  
Contents of nav data window  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.1.2  
Compass display  
The compass display, displayed at the bottom half of the screen in the  
combination display, provides steering information. The compass rose shows  
two triangles: the black triangle (hollow on monochrome model) shows the  
bearing to destination waypoint and the red (solid on monochrome) triangle,  
which moves with ship’s course, shows own ship’s course.  
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors,  
show the latest 10 minutes of temperature and depth data. The range of the  
depth graph is 50 feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth.  
Destination  
waypoint  
Speed over ground  
Range to destination waypoint  
Speed through water  
RNG 99.9nm  
003WPT  
10.0kt STW 10.0 kt  
SOG  
Estimated time of  
Time-to-go  
TTG 0D 9H 59M  
23th23:59  
ETA  
arrival at destination  
to destination  
BRG  
359.9°M  
TMP  
16.2°F  
DPT  
45.2ft  
Destination  
20  
10  
0
N
waypoint bearing  
(black and filled  
on color model,  
hollow on mono-  
chrome model)  
Ship's course  
(red and filled on  
color model, filled  
on monochrome model  
)
CSE  
359.9°M  
50  
Depth  
graph*  
Water  
temperature  
graph*  
* = Requires appropriate  
sensor.  
Shown (in red on  
color model) when  
direction to steer  
is "left."  
Direction to steer  
(green on color model)  
Own ship marker  
Bearing scale  
(For color model, black when within XTE range,  
yellow when over; flashes when over XTE range  
on monochrome model)  
XTE monitor (See next page for description.)  
Compass display  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor  
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the amount you are  
off course and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker  
shows the direction and amount your ship is off course. It is shown in black when  
the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when  
it is over. An arrow appears at the right or left side of the XTE monitor and it  
shows the direction to steer to return to intended course. (For the color model  
the arrow is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you  
should steer right.) In the example on the previous page you would steer right to  
return to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker  
stays at the center of the XTE monitor.  
Soft keys  
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below  
for how to set.  
Setting the range for the XTE monitor  
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft  
key to display the following window.  
XTE LIMIT  
0 .1nm  
XTE range setting window  
2. Use the cursor pad to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be  
cleared by pressing the [CLEAR] key.  
3. Use the [ENTER] knob to set value, or press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.  
RESET XTE: Displayed when destination is set, and enables you to restart  
navigation. When this soft key is pressed, the following window is displayed.  
RESTART NAVGATION TO  
CURRENT WPT.  
ARE YOU SURE?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.1.3  
Highway display  
The highway display, displayed at the lower half of the screen in the combination  
display, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended course. It  
is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker  
shows relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the  
direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to  
steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off course.  
Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return  
to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays  
aligned with the intended course line.  
Speed over ground, speed through water  
Destination  
waypoint  
Range to  
destination waypoint  
RNG 99.9 nm  
003WPT  
10.0kt STW 10.0 kt  
SOG  
Time-to-go  
to destination  
TTG 0D 9H 59M  
23th23:59  
ETA  
Estimated time of  
arrival at destination  
WPT001  
Destination waypoint  
Intended  
course  
Own ship marker  
XTE range  
0.009nm  
0.9 nm  
0.9 nm  
Direction to steer (green on color model)  
XTE monitor  
Shown (in red on color model) when  
direction to steer is "left."  
Highway display  
Soft keys  
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for the XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on  
the previous page for how to set.  
RESET XTE: Displayed when destination is set, and enables you to restart  
navigation. See the description on the previous page.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.1.4  
Nav data display  
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data. The user may  
select what data to display and where to display it, on the NAV DATA DISPLAY  
SETUP menu. For details see paragraph “5.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”  
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor  
is not connected.  
Position  
TRIP LOG  
TTG  
POSITION  
103 nm  
0
D
2
H
30M  
34° 34. 5678' N  
ETA  
120° 34. 5678'  
W
1st 1:25  
WPT POSITION  
34° 14. 5678' N  
120° 14. 5678'  
SOG  
10.0 kt  
W
DATE  
TIME  
2001  
FEB 1  
STW  
COURSE  
01:27:05  
10.0 kt  
101.6°  
RANGE  
M
BEARING  
Half-screen display  
9.2°  
M
0.18 nm  
DEPTH  
TEMP  
1324.1 ft  
18.2 °C  
Water temperature  
Depth  
Bearing to  
waypoint  
Range to  
waypoint  
Course  
Speed through  
water  
Speed over ground  
Waypoint  
Position  
Full-screen display  
Nav data displays  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.2  
Presentation Mode  
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up,  
course-up and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, first press the  
[HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter soft keys are not displayed. Press the MODE soft  
key to select desired mode. Each press of the key changes the presentation  
mode and presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen)  
cyclically in the sequence of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.  
3.2.1  
North-up  
North is at the top of the display and own ship, shown by a filled circle. This  
mode is useful for long-range navigation.  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° TRIP NU  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
99.9 nm  
MARK  
ENTRY  
16.0nm  
MODE  
NTH UP  
NAV  
POS  
WP-002  
FISH  
D.BOX  
ON/ OFF  
BRIDGE  
Plotter display, north-up mode  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.2.2  
Course-up  
The destination is at the top of the screen when a destination is set. When no  
destination is set, the course or heading is at the top of the screen at the  
moment the course-up mode is selected. A filled triangle marks own ship’s  
position.  
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must be output from the NavNet  
display unit connected to the GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the own  
ship marker in the course-up mode on other NavNet display units.  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
M
TRIP CU  
99.9 nm  
+
WPT 001  
MARK  
16.0nm  
ENTRY  
MODE  
CSE UP  
CENTER  
GO TO  
CURSOR  
D. BOX  
ON/ OFF  
Plotter display, course-up mode, destination set  
3.2.3  
Auto course-up  
The course is at the top of screen at the moment the auto course-up mode is  
selected. In this mode, the current course is kept at the top of the screen when  
the change is within 22.5 degrees. For example, if your vessel turns larger than  
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart display will rotate so that your course  
is pointing towards the top of the screen again. A filled triangle marks own ship’s  
position.  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°  
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
M
TRIP CU  
99.9 nm  
+
MARK  
ENTRY  
16.0 nm  
MODE  
AT CU  
CENTER  
GOTO  
CURSOR  
D. BOX  
ON/OFF  
Plotter display, auto course-up mode  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.3  
3.4  
Shifting the Display  
The plotter display can be shifted on the plotter display as below.  
1. Press the cursor pad to display the cursor.  
2. Locate the cursor at a screen edge and press and hold down the cursor pad.  
The screen shifts in the direction opposite of cursor location.  
3. To return the cursor to the screen center, press the CENTER soft key. This  
also returns own ship marker to the screen center.  
Chart Scale  
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The  
[-] key expands the chart range; the [+] key shrinks it.  
Charts scales  
nm  
km  
0.125 0.25 0.5  
1
2
4
8
16  
32  
64 128 256 512 1024 2048  
0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6 59.3 119 237 474 948 1896 3792  
sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4 36.8 73.7 147 295 589 1178 2356  
Note: When the display is expanded or shrunk beyond the range of the chart  
card in use the message “NO CHART” appears, along with the appropriate  
chart icon. See the illustration on the next page for details.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.5  
Chart Cards  
3.5.1  
Chart card overview  
Your system reads FURUNO and NavCharts™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP  
charts, depending on its specification.  
When you insert a suitable chart card in the slot and your boat is near any chart  
graphic data, a chart appears. If a wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart scale  
is selected, land masses will appear hollow. Insert the proper card and select a  
suitable chart scale. Chart icons appear at the top of the display to help you  
select a suitable chart scale. The table below shows the chart icons and their  
meanings.  
Chart icons and their meanings  
Icon  
Meaning  
Proper card is not inserted or  
chart scale is too small.  
Operate the RANGE key to  
adjust chart scale.  
Chart scale is too large.  
Operate the RANGE key to  
adjust chart scale.  
Suitable chart scale is  
selected.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.5.2  
Indices and chart enlargement  
When the [RANGE] key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the  
chart. These frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart  
can be zoomed in on.  
Sample chart (Japan) showing indices  
When a chart cannot be displayed  
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:  
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.  
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.  
When this happens, select proper chart scale.  
Note: Indices can be turned on or off with “Chart border line.” See page 5-13 for  
FURUNO and NAVIONICS charts and 5-16 for C-MAP charts.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts™  
Chart symbols  
The table below shows FURUNO and NavCharts™ mini chart symbols and their  
meanings.  
Chart symbols  
Symbol  
Description  
Position of Sounding  
Obstruction  
Symbol  
Description  
Summit  
Wreck  
Lighthouse  
Lighted Buoy  
Buoy  
Fishing Reef  
Platform  
Anchorage  
Radio Station  
Data for aids to navigation  
Selected FURUNO and NavCharts™ charts can show buoy and lighthouse data.  
Simply place the cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.  
Place the cursor on  
a lighthouse or buoy mark.  
Lighthouse mark  
Example of data displayed  
Period (ex.: 6 seconds)  
Range and bearing  
from own ship  
Visibility in nautical  
mile (ex.: 12 miles)  
NAVAID: /FL 6S 12M  
FROM OS 52.38nm 48.0°  
FL : Flashing  
: Fixed light  
F
F FL : Fixed and Flashing light  
MO : Morse code light  
Oc : Occulting light  
Example of buoy, lighthouse data  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Port service icons (NavCharts™ only)  
NavCharts™ show services available at ports, with icons. Use the cursor pad to  
place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor), and then push  
the [ENTER] knob. The services available appear at the top of the display.  
Detailed information of service  
selected  
List of services  
at the port selected  
359.9°M TRIP NU  
Emergency  
medical service  
Fueling station  
19.9 kt  
99.9 nm  
FIRST AID  
16.0nm  
Water  
Traveler's  
supply station  
service station  
Customer  
service station  
Marine  
equipment service  
CANCEL  
Information center  
Port  
Sailboat icon (Port)  
Plotter display, showing port service display  
Current (or tide) data  
Some NavCharts provide for calculation of  
the current (or tide) data for any date.  
Additionally it displays the time of sunrise  
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)  
34 24. 3456 N 359.9  
0.74  
U  
0.86  
+
Current  
0
0.61  
DATE  
0.48  
0.35  
0
4
8
16 20 24  
12  
Time: 04:35  
Speed (KT): 0.45ft  
Angle ( ): 142  
21/08/02 +00  
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on a  
current icon ( ).  
2. Press the [ENTER] knob to show the  
current window.  
3. Press the DATE soft key, and then enter  
the date desired.  
4. Press the ENTER soft key.  
Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack  
KT  
AT  
323 7:58  
Flood 4:58 1.2  
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15  
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15  
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15  
Moonphase:  
FULLY IN 1 DAY  
Moonrise: 14:06  
Moonset: 02:15  
Sunrise: 05:03  
Sunset: 19:10  
RETURN  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.5.4  
C-MAP cards  
Cursor and data display  
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also  
show caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-map charts. In addition,  
you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.  
1. Press the cursor pad to turn the cursor on.  
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the position desired.  
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.  
Objects  
Spot Sounding  
Depth area  
Exclusive economic zone  
Military practice area  
Restricted area  
Source of data  
Objects window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.  
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to display details for object selected.  
Depth area  
Depth range value1  
0.00 Meters  
Depth range value2  
1829.00 Meters  
Example of caution area window  
6. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.  
7. Repeat step 4 to 6 to select other item.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Icon data  
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.  
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.  
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU  
+
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt  
99.9 nm  
16.0nm  
MARK  
ENTRY  
MODE  
NTH UP  
CENTER  
GO TO  
CURSOR  
D. BOX  
ON /OFF  
Lighthouse icon  
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to show data. For example, the following window  
appears for a lighthouse.  
Objects  
Lighthouse  
Tower  
Light  
Underwater Rock  
Depth contour  
Depth contour  
Depth area  
Source of data  
Object windows  
3. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.  
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to display detailed information.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Navigation mark, fixed  
Light.  
Color  
white  
Height  
7. 00 Meters  
Light characteristic  
occulting  
XXXXXXXX  
XXXXXXXX  
Sample lighthouse data  
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to close the Objects window.  
Tide information  
The C-MAP chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.  
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.  
T
1. Press the cursor pad to place the cursor on a Tide icon ( ).  
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.  
34 24. 3456 N 359.9  
NU  
+
OBJECTS  
024nm  
Tide height  
Cartographic area  
Source of data  
T
RETURN  
Objects window  
3. Use the cursor pad to select “Tide height.”  
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the TIDE window.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
TRIP NU  
99.9 nm  
0.86  
0.74  
t
Horizontal  
Cursor  
DATE  
0.61  
0.48  
0.35  
Vertical  
Cursor  
0
4
8
12 16 20 24  
Time: 04:35  
Height: 0.45ft  
Draught: 0.65ft  
01/07/30 +13:30  
43° 32.860N  
010° 18.022E  
RETURN  
Port info  
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)  
High Water(max) 0.86ft(13:30 L)  
Low Water(min) 0.35ft(21:00 L)  
Sunrise 07:52L Sunset 16:53 L  
Tide window  
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.  
CHANGE DATE  
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)  
01. 01. 2001  
LIMIT: 31.12.2099  
Date window  
6. Use ◄ or ► to position the cursor where desired and then rotate the  
[ENTER] knob to set. Repeat to enter complete date.  
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.  
8. Use ◄ or ► to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.  
9. Use ▲ or ▼ to shift the level cursor to select draught.  
10.See the time, height and draught indications below the tide graph for tide  
information.  
11.Press the RETURN soft key to close the TIDE window.  
Objects  
Port service icons  
Port area  
Selected C-MAP shows services available at  
ports, with lists.  
Port/Marine  
Fuel station  
Water  
Electricity  
Showers  
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on  
the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor)  
desired.  
2. Push the [ENTER] knob.  
3. Select the service name desired. The  
services available appear.  
Pubric toilets  
Pubric telephone  
4. Press the CANCEL soft key.  
C-map, port service display  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.6  
Working with Track  
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from a  
navigation receiver. This section shows you what you can do with track, from  
turning it on or off to changing its plotting interval. Own ship’s track is displayed  
in the default setting and on the color model it is red.  
3.6.1  
Displaying track  
Own ship track  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
TRACK  
CONTROL  
TRACK  
CONTROL  
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP  
ON  
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR  
RED  
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY  
ON  
TARGET TRACK COLOR  
WHITE  
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP  
ON  
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY  
ON  
EDIT  
EDIT  
INTERVAL  
TRACK  
RESUME  
TRACK  
RESUME  
TIME  
TIME INTERVAL  
00m10s  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00.10nm  
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)  
2000PTS  
INTERVAL  
ERASE  
T & M  
ERASE  
T & M  
TIME  
TIME INTERVAL  
00m10s  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00.10nm  
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)  
2000PTS  
MARK  
SETUP  
MARK  
SETUP  
(MARK MEMORY)  
(6000)POINTS  
RETURN  
RETURN  
(MARK MEMORY)  
(6000)POINTS  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Track control menu  
2. Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.  
TRACK DISPLAY  
L
ON  
OFF  
L
Track display window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK  
STATUS window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above  
as an example, 1234 points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Target track  
Target track, NMEA format TTM data sentence (target data fed from an ARP  
board-equipped MODEL1833/1833C series network radar), may be turned on or  
off as desired. The default setting is ON.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select to ON or OFF as appropriate.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3.6.2  
Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track  
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to  
record its track. You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory,  
as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
TRACK  
CONTROL  
TRACK  
CONTROL  
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP  
ON  
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP  
ON  
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR  
RED  
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR  
RED  
EDIT  
EDIT  
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY  
ON  
TARGET TRACK COLOR  
WHITE  
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY  
ON  
TARGET TRACK COLOR  
WHITE  
TRACK  
RESUME  
TRACK  
HALT  
TRACK  
RESUME  
INTERVAL  
INTERVAL  
ERASE  
T & M  
ERASE  
T & M  
TIME  
TIME  
TIME INTERVAL  
00m10s  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00.10nm  
TIME INTERVAL  
00m10s  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00.10nm  
TRACK  
HALT  
MARK  
SETUP  
MARK  
SETUP  
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)  
2000PTS  
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)  
2000PTS  
RETURN  
RETURN  
(MARK MEMORY)  
(6000)POINTS  
(MARK MEMORY)  
(6000)POINTS  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
NOT TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
Track is plotted  
Track not plotted  
Track control menu (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK  
HALT” and the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
window changes to “NOT TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed  
at the top of the plotter display and own ship marker becomes a hollow circle.  
To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK HALT soft key.  
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.6.3  
Changing track color (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple,  
blue and white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to  
discriminate between previous day’s track, etc.  
Own ship’s track  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.  
TRACK COLOR  
L
RED  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
LIGHT BLUE  
PURPLE  
BLUE  
WHITE  
L
Own ship track color window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Target track  
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red (default setting),  
yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.6.4  
Track plotting method and interval for own ship track  
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from a navigation  
receiver is stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A  
shorter interval provides for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage  
time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the oldest  
track is erased to make room for the latest.  
Track plotting method  
Track may be plotted by time or distance interval. The default setting is “time.”  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select INTERVAL.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.  
INTERVAL  
L
TIME  
DISTANCE  
L
Plot window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is  
useful for conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat  
is stationary.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Track plotting interval  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as  
appropriate.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window,  
depending on what you selected at step 2.  
Setting range: 0 min 01 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec  
Default setting: 10 sec  
TIME INTERVAL  
00m10s  
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)  
Setting range: 00.01 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)  
Default setting: 0.1 nm  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00.10nm  
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)  
Interval windows  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
4. Use the [ENTER] knob and the cursor pad to enter numeric data. The  
[CLEAR] key functions to clear an entire line of data.  
5. Push the [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3.6.5  
Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting  
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount  
may be distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and  
6000 marks.  
When you change the track memory setting all tracks and marks in the memory  
are erased. If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see  
paragraph “6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card”.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &  
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the memory (track & mark) window.  
TRACK MEMORY  
2000/8000 POINTS  
Memory (track & mark) window  
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter desired number of track  
memory points.  
5. Push the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure to  
change the track memory capacity.  
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.6.6  
Erasing track  
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You  
can erase ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color (color model only) and by  
area.  
Erasing own ship track by area  
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This function is not available  
on the overlay display (MODEL1722C/1723C series).  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
ERASE ALL TRACKS  
ERASE ALL TRACKS  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA  
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR  
ERASE TARGET TRACKS  
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES  
ERASE MARKS BY AREA  
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA  
ERASE TARGET TRACKS  
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES  
ERASE MARKS BY AREA  
EDIT  
EDIT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Erase menu  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA and press the EDIT  
soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.  
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left of corner which you  
want to erase track from.  
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.  
5. Drag the cursor diagonally to the bottom right corner of the area which you  
want to erase track from.  
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if it is all right to  
delete the track.  
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to delete the track selected.  
8. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Erasing own ship track by color (color model)  
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR and press the  
EDIT soft key.  
ERASE TRK BY COLOR  
L
RED  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
LIGHT BLUE  
PURPLE  
BLUE  
WHITE  
L
Erase track by color window  
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color you want to erase and push the  
[ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key. You are asked if it is all right to delete the  
track.  
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase track color selected.  
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
Erasing all own ship track  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL TRACKS and press the EDIT soft  
key.  
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all own ship track.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Erasing all target tracks  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS and press the EDIT  
soft key.  
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all target tracks.  
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.7  
Marks, Lines  
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot.  
Marks can be inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors (MODEL1722C  
/1723C series): Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.  
L
Mark shapes  
3.7.1  
Entering a mark  
1. Place the cursor on the location where you want a mark to appear.  
2. Press the MARK ENTRY soft key. (Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter  
soft keys are not shown.)  
The mark is inscribed in the size and shape selected on the MARKS & LINES  
menu. The default mark attributes are size, normal; color (MODEL1722C/1723C  
series), yellow, and shape, hollow circle (○).  
3.7.2  
Changing mark attributes  
You can select the shape and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK  
SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.  
MARKS &  
LINES  
MARKS &  
LINES  
MARKS/LINES COLOR  
YELLOW  
MARKS SHAPE  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARKS SHAPE  
LINES STYLE  
.
LINES STYLE  
MARKS SIZE  
.
LARGE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Marks & lines menu  
3. For the MODEL1722C/1723C series, do the following to select mark and  
line color.  
Select MARKS/LINES COLOR and press the EDIT soft key.  
Use the cursor pad to choose color desired and press the ENTER soft key.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
4. Select MARKS SHAPE and press the EDIT soft key.  
MARK SHAPE  
L
L
L
Mark shape window  
5. Use the cursor pad to select mark shape desired and then press the ENTER  
soft key.  
6. Select MARKS SIZE and press the EDIT soft key.  
7. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as  
appropriate.  
8. Press [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.  
9. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3.7.3  
Selecting line type  
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc.  
You can even construct simple charts.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and MARKS SETUP soft keys to show the MARK & LINES  
menu.  
MARKS &  
LINES  
MARKS &  
LINES  
MARKS/LINES COLOR  
YELLOW  
MARKS SHAPE  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARKS SHAPE  
LINES STYLE  
.
LINES STYLE  
MARKS SIZE  
.
LARGE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS  
TRACKING  
TRACK: 1234/2000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MARK :  
9/6000  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Marks & lines menu  
2. Select LINE STYLE and press the EDIT soft key.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
LINES STYLE  
L
L
Line style window  
3. Use the cursor pad to select line style desired and press the ENTER soft key.  
Line style “dot” disables line drawing. The edge of lines is determined by  
mark shape. For example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a  
circle as below.  
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3.7.4  
Erasing marks, lines  
Erasing an individual mark  
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.  
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase the mark.  
Erasing an individual line  
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase and press the [CLEAR] key.  
Placing the cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both  
line segments.  
Erasing marks, lines by area  
This function is not available on the overlay area (MODEL1722C/1723C series).  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA and press the EDIT  
soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.  
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area  
which is to enclose the marks/lines to erase.  
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.  
5. Drag the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which is to  
enclose the marks/lines to erase.  
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if it is all right to  
delete the marks/lines selected. Press the [ENTER] knob to delete.  
7. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Erasing all marks, lines  
You can erase all marks and lines. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all  
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS  
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES and press the EDIT  
soft key.  
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all marks and lines.  
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.8  
Waypoints  
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage  
whether it be a starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the  
simplest piece of information your equipment requires to get you to a destination,  
in the shortest distance possible.  
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You  
may enter a waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position  
(page3-61), by cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list  
(manual input of latitude and longitude).  
3.8.1  
Entering waypoints  
Entering a waypoint at own ship position  
Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint.  
This new waypoint will automatically be saved in the waypoint list, under the  
youngest empty waypoint number.  
Entering a waypoint with the cursor  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY  
CURSOR soft keys. The plotter display appears.  
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired.  
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows  
waypoint mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date),  
position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.  
NEW  
WPT  
MARK NAME  
SELECT  
MARK  
001WPT
COMMENT  
COORD  
TYPE  
0 2 : 3 6 01JAN01
POSITION  
N < - -> S  
E < - -> W  
L A T  
3 4 ° 1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N  
L O N  
SAVE  
1 3 4 ° 1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W  
RETURN  
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS  
0 . 0 0 n m  
Waypoint window  
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key  
to register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change  
waypoint data.  
6. For the color model, press the SELECT MARK soft key.  
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
SELECT MARK  
Waypoint mark shape selection window  
8. Operate the cursor pad to select shape desired.  
9. Press the ENTER soft key.  
10. For the MODEL1722C/1723C series, press the SELECT MARK and MARK  
COLOR soft keys in that order to open the waypoint mark color selection  
window. Select color desired and press the ENTER soft key.  
SELECT COLOR  
L
RED  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
LIGHT BLUE  
PURPLE  
BLUE  
WHITE  
L
Waypoint mark color selection window  
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the  
proximity alarm radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or  
color, enter all zeroes as the proximity alarm radius.  
11. You can change the name (1 to 6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L  
position and the proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:  
a)Use the cursor pad to select the NAME, COMMENT, POSITION or  
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for  
visual and aural alarms when your boat nears a waypoint by the distance  
specified. A circle with a diagonal line through it marks any waypoint for  
which its proximity alarm radius is other than zero.)  
b)Use the cursor pad to select location.  
c)Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select appropriate alphanumeric character.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
12.Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.  
13.Enter another waypoint with the cursor, or press the [MENU] key to close the  
menu.  
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing  
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and  
bearing to a target found on a radar.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG &  
BRG soft keys.  
3. An “X” (red on the MODEL1722C/1723C series) appears at own ship position,  
and it is the origin point for range and bearing. Operate the cursor pad to  
place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing from own ship to  
the cursor appear at the top of the display.  
4. The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.  
Operate the cursor pad to select location, and then press the START POINT  
soft key.  
5. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows  
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of  
waypoint and proximity alarm radius.  
NEW  
WPT  
MARK NAME  
SELECT  
MARK  
001WPT
COMMENT  
COORD  
TYPE  
0 2 : 3 6 01JAN01
POSITION  
N < - -> S  
E < - -> W  
L A T  
3 4 ° 1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N  
L O N  
SAVE  
1 3 4 ° 1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W  
RETURN  
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS  
0 . 0 0 n m  
Waypoint window  
6. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in  
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.  
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint. To enter another waypoint  
with the cursor select desired location with the cursor pad and press the  
NEW WPT soft key.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to finish.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list  
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.  
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest) or  
ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in alphanumeric order) soft key.  
WPT  
ALPHA  
WPT  
LOCAL  
ABALONE  
00:00 01JAN01  
35°47.010'N  
135°21.000'W  
FISH  
00:00 01JAN01  
065.9°  
GOTO  
NEW  
GOTO  
34°41.000'N  
135°21.030'W  
350.9  
°
1.83 nm  
3.80 nm  
CRAB  
00:00 01JAN01  
CRAB  
00:00 01JAN01  
NEW  
WPT  
WPT  
34°42.000'N  
050.9°  
34°42.000'N  
050.9°  
135°21.050'W  
1.98 nm  
135°21.050'W  
1.98 nm  
EDIT  
WPT  
EDIT  
WPT  
ABALONE  
00:00 01JAN01  
35°47.010'N  
135°21.000'W  
FISH  
00:00 01JAN01  
34°41.000'N  
135°21.030'W  
065.9°  
1.83 nm  
350.9  
°
ERASE  
WPT  
ERASE  
WPT  
3.80 nm  
LOBSTER  
00:00 01JAN01  
LOBSTER  
00:00 01JAN01  
RETURN  
RETURN  
144.9°  
144.9°  
38°44.300'N  
135°21.010'W  
38°44.300'N  
135°21.010'W  
4.93nm  
4.93nm  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO  
SEARCH FOR  
---  
Alphanumeric waypoint list  
Local waypoint list  
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists  
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure  
on the previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.  
5. Select the position box and enter waypoint position desired, using the cursor  
pad to select location and rotating the [ENTER] knob to enter digit.  
6. If desired change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in  
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.  
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3.8.2  
Editing waypoint data  
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter  
display.  
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.  
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to edit.  
5. Press the EDIT WPT soft key.  
6. Edit waypoint as appropriate.  
7. Press the SAVE soft key.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display  
You may change/edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and  
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.  
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want  
to change. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is  
correctly selected.  
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft  
key:  
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.  
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.  
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint, see paragraph 3.8.3.  
5. Press appropriate soft key. If you pressed the EDIT WPT soft key the  
waypoint entry window appears; edit data as appropriate. For MOVE WPT do  
the following:  
a) Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired for the  
waypoint. A line connects previous position and new position.  
b) Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and  
its new position is recorded on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as  
destination or is part of a route, you are asked if you are sure to move the  
waypoint. In this case, push the [ENTER] knob to move the waypoint, or  
press the [CLEAR] key to cancel.  
6. Press the MENU key to finish.  
Range and bearing from  
own ship to cursor  
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU  
+
080° 22. 3456'E 59.9 nm  
99.9 nm  
16.0nm  
Press to alternately display  
range/bearing from own ship  
to cursor, range/bearing from  
original waypoint position to  
cursor position.  
Below is an example of the  
range/bearing from original  
waypoint position to cursor  
position.  
(1) Select waypoint to move,  
then press EDIT/MOVE  
RNG  
BRG  
FISH  
and MOVE WPT soft keys.  
(2) Drag cursor to new position,  
then push the [ENTER] knob.  
CANCEL  
BRIDGE  
WP-002  
34° 22. 3456’N FROM 5.3°M  
+
080° 22. 3456’E FISH  
1.45 nm  
Plotter display  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.8.3  
Erasing waypoints  
Erasing a waypoint with the cursor  
1. Press the cursor pad to turn on the cursor.  
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase.  
A flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is  
correctly selected.  
3. Press the [CLEAR] key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.  
4. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the plotter screen  
(if it is currently displayed) and the waypoint list.  
Note: You may also erase a waypoint while the waypoint entering mode  
(“WAYPOINT BY CURSOR”) is active as follows:  
a) Place the cursor on the waypoint to erase.  
b) Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key.  
c) Press the ERASE WPT soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.  
d) Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.  
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to erase.  
5. Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the  
waypoint.  
6. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list  
and the plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.8.4  
Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™)  
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you  
may turn them off.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.  
CHART  
DETAILS  
CHART  
DETAILS  
LAT LON GRID  
GREEN  
TEXT INFORMATION  
ON  
LAT LON GRID  
ON  
TEXT INFORMATION  
ON  
EDIT  
EDIT  
WAYPOINTS  
LARGE  
WAYPOINT NAMES  
ON  
WAYPOINTS  
LARGE  
WAYPOINT NAMES  
ON  
CNTOUR  
LINE  
CNTOUR  
LINE  
CHART BORDER LINES  
ON  
CHART BORDER LINES  
ON  
LANDMASS  
BRT YELLOW  
BACKGROUND  
BLUE  
LANDMASS  
BRIGHT  
NAVAIDS  
ON  
NAVAIDS  
LIGHT SECTOR INFO  
ON  
RETURN  
RETURN  
ON  
LIGHT SECTOR INFO  
ON  
OTHER SYMBOLS  
ON  
OTHER SYMBOLS  
WHITE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Chart details menu  
3. Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINTS.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.  
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.  
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape  
selected.  
OFF:  
Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints which are part  
of the route in use or the waypoint which is set as destination are  
(is) always shown regardless of this setting.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.8.5  
Searching waypoints  
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric list as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST  
soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.  
WPT  
ALPHA  
ABALONE  
00:00 01JAN01  
GOTO  
NEW  
35°47.010'N  
350.9°  
135°21.000'W  
3.80 nm  
CRAB  
00:00 01JAN01  
WPT  
34°42.000'N  
135°21.050'W  
050.9°  
1.98 nm  
EDIT  
WPT  
FISH  
00:00 01JAN01  
065.9°  
34°41.000'N  
135°21.030'W  
ERASE  
WPT  
1.83 nm  
LOBSTER  
00:00 01JAN01  
RETURN  
144.9°  
38°44.300'N  
135°21.010'W  
4.93nm  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO  
SEARCH FOR  
---  
Search window  
Alphanumeric list  
3. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter up to three alphanumeric  
characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at  
the top of the screen.  
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.9  
Routes  
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes,  
requiring a series of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after  
another. The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called  
a route. Your unit can automatically advance to the next waypoint on a route, so  
you do not have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly.  
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.  
3.9.1  
Creating routes  
Entering a route with existing waypoints  
This method constructs routes using existing waypoints.  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route menu. (No data will be shown  
if there is no routes created.)  
ROUTE  
001  
LENGTH  
Total length of route  
Route name  
WAYPOINTS  
35  
25.6 nm  
GOTO  
NEW  
002  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
2
ROUTE  
56.7 nm  
EDIT  
ROUTE  
003  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
3
21.1 nm  
Number of waypoints  
in route  
ERASE  
ROUTE  
004  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
3
21.1 nm  
RETURN  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO  
SEARCH FOR  
---  
Route menu  
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.  
NEW  
ROUTE  
ROUTE NAME  
0 0 1  
PLOT  
COMMENT  
LOCAL  
LIST  
ALPHA  
LIST  
CONECT  
CANCEL  
New route entry screen  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A  
route name may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.  
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.  
7. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint, and press the ADD WPT soft key to  
add it to the route.  
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.  
Note: To clear a waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key. Each  
pressing of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.  
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.  
10.Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Entering a route with the cursor  
This method allows you to construct a route directly on the plotter display, using  
existing waypoints or new locations. Any new location will be saved as a  
waypoint, under the youngest empty waypoint number.  
1. Follow step 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.  
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.  
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD  
WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WPT soft key appears).  
4. Press the ADD WPT soft key (or ADD NEW WPT soft key).  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.  
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register the route.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Creating voyage-based routes  
You can create routes based on your ship’s track, and each route may contain  
35 points. The route can be created automatically (by time or distance), or  
manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous track.  
The “SAVE” icon appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is  
being created.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.  
ROUTE  
001  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
35  
25.6 nm  
NEW  
002  
SELECT  
ROUTE  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
2
56.7 nm  
003  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
3
21.1 nm  
004  
LENGTH  
WAYPOINTS  
3
21.1 nm  
RETURN  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO  
SEARCH FOR  
---  
Save route menu  
4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.  
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points on an existing route, press  
the SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the NEW soft key, then enter  
route number to use.  
SAVE  
ROUTE  
ROUTE NAME  
Next consecutive route number  
0 0 6  
BCKTRK  
TIME  
COMMENT  
BCKTRK  
DIST  
MANUAL  
CANCEL  
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION  
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE  
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.  
Save route window  
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by distance or manual  
entry pressing by one of BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL soft  
key as appropriate. For manual go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK  
DIST one of the following displays appears.  
TIME INTERVAL  
DISTANCE INTERVAL  
00h01m  
00.1nm  
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)  
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)  
Displays for entry of time, distance interval  
7. Enter interval desired with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob. Press the  
START LOG and RETURN soft keys followed by the [MENU] key to close the  
menu. At this moment, voyage based route will be created.  
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:  
a) Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own  
ship position. A new waypoint is created under the next consecutive  
waypoint number and that waypoint is added to the route. (You may close  
the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN soft by followed by  
the MENU key.)  
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.  
To stop recording waypoints and save the route  
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route at any time as shown in  
the procedure below. When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total  
35 WPTS have been already registered in the route. Stop creating voyage based  
route.” is displayed. In this case, automatically creating voyage-based route  
stops.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE  
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.  
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoint and save the  
route.  
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.9.2  
Connecting routes  
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new  
route.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.  
5. If desired, enter the name for the new route and enter comment.  
6. Press the CONNECT soft key.  
7. Use the cursor pad and the [ENTER] knob to enter the route name for the  
first route, beneath FIRST in the CONNECT ROUTE window.  
NEW  
ROUTE  
ROUTE NAME  
0 0 1  
F < -- > R  
COMMENT  
CONNECT ROUTE  
FIRST  
SECOND  
_ _ _ _ _ _  
_ _ _ _ _ _  
FORWARD FORWARD  
SAVE  
CANCEL  
Connect route window  
8. If necessary press the F< - ->R soft key to select direction to follow the  
waypoints of the route, forward or reverse.  
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.  
10. Press the SAVE soft key.  
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is  
exceeded an error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one  
or both routes so the total number of waypoints does not exceed 35.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.9.3  
Inserting waypoints  
Waypoints can be inserted into a route as follows:  
Inserting waypoint from the route list  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.  
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.  
6. Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.  
EDIT  
ROUTE  
ROUTE NAME: 001  
COMMENT:  
LEG  
29.9°  
01  
INSERT  
WPT  
001WPT  
34°44.111'N  
135°21.134'W  
12.0nm  
02  
003WPT  
REMOVE  
WPT  
34°43.432'N  
135°41.456'W  
159.9°  
6.00nm  
002WPT  
03  
34°14.124'N  
CHANGE  
WPT  
135°21.567'W  
50.5°  
29.8nm  
04  
005WPT  
34°44.569'N  
135°21.152'W  
359.9°  
3.0nm  
COORD  
TYPE  
05  
008WPT  
34°54.124'N  
135°21.888'W  
RETURN  
Edit route menu  
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to place the cursor at the location where you want to insert a  
waypoint.  
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as appropriate. The local  
list appears.  
LOCAL LIST  
001  
001WPT  
34°44.111'N  
135°21.134'W  
002  
002WPT  
34°43.432'N  
135°41.456'W  
003  
003WPT  
34°14.124'N  
135°21.567'W  
004  
004WPT  
34°34.490'N  
135°51.387'W  
Waypoint list for editing a route (local list)  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
9. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to insert. (You can switch  
between the local list and alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and  
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)  
When selecting INSERT WPT, this waypoint is inserted before the waypoint  
selected at step 7.  
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key, whichever is displayed.  
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display  
Inserting a waypoint before first or last waypoint in a route  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.  
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.  
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.  
7. Operate the cursor to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the  
route. A flashing diamond appears when the waypoint is correctly selected.  
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending  
on the waypoint you selected at step 7.  
9. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD  
WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).  
10.Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).  
11.Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route  
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a route waypoint before the first or last  
waypoint in a route.”  
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints.  
The SPLIT LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when the line is  
correctly selected.  
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key.  
4. The INSERT NEW WP soft key appears. Dray the cursor to a new location or  
select an existing waypoint, in which case the INSERT WPT key replaces the  
INSERT NEW WP key.  
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.9.4  
Removing waypoints from a route  
Removing a waypoint from the route list  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Select a route.  
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.  
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.  
7. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Select a route.  
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.  
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.  
7. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to  
remove from the route.  
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the  
waypoint erased.  
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3.9.5  
Erasing routes  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.  
5. Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase  
the route.  
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the route, or the [CLEAR] key to escape.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.10 Navigation  
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,”  
waypoints, port services and routes.  
Note: When the plotter data is received from other NavNet unit connected,  
reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by using ZDA  
sentenceReferring to “6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network”.  
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”  
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the  
data indefinitely in your unit’s memory.  
Selecting quick point entry method  
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1POINT, 35POINTS (up to  
35 points) or 35PTS/PORT SVC. (For how to navigate to points/port services  
see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services” on page 3-47.)  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.  
3. Use the cursor pad to select SET GOTO METHOD and press the EDIT soft  
key.  
GOTO METHOD  
1POINT  
35POINTS  
35PTS/PORT SVC  
Goto method window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select method desired.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Navigating to a single quick point  
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a  
new location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).  
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.  
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1 press GOTO CURSOR or  
GOTO WPT soft key.  
A solid line (light-blue on the MODEL1722C/1723C series) with arrows connects  
between own ship and destination, which is marked as “QP<01>” for  
cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. Arrows on the  
line show the direction to follow to get to the point. Range and bearing from own  
ship to the destination appear at the top of screen. The quick point is saved to  
the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Navigating to multiple quick points  
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry  
method” on the previous page.  
2. Press the GOTO soft key.  
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or  
a new location (ADD QP soft key appears).  
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3 press the SELECT WPT or ADD QP  
soft key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.  
To erase last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST QP  
(ERASE LST WP) soft key.  
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to finish.  
A solid line runs between own ship and first waypoint and a dashed line between  
other waypoints. (For the MODEL1722C/1723C series, those lines are colored  
light-blue and green, respectively.) Quick points are numbered in sequential  
order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from  
own ship to the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are  
saved as a route, under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).  
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints  
Selecting waypoint from the plotter display  
1. Operate the cursor pad to select a waypoint.  
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.  
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP  
menu.  
Selecting waypoint from the waypoint list  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.  
4. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint.  
6. Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.  
For either of the above methods, a solid line (light-blue on the  
MODEL1722C/1723C series) runs between waypoint selected and own ship’s  
position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to the waypoint.  
Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Selecting an external waypoint  
You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected  
with NMEA cable. This function requires RMB sentence.  
1. Press the [MENU] key, PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER  
SETUP menu.  
2. Use the trackball to select QP.  
3. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] key to show the QP window.  
QP  
EXT WPT (RMB)  
INTERNAL  
QP window  
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).  
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.  
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar  
screen, a lollipop appears to show the waypoint.)  
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts™/C-MAP)  
Some NavCharts™ and C-MAP card have a port service list which shows  
services available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.) You can use the list to  
set destination as follows:  
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point  
entry method” on page 3-45.  
2. Press the GOTO soft key. Then, soft key titles change as in the figure below.  
40°45.971'N  
13°57.462'E  
0.26 nm  
180.2°M  
FROM  
OS  
GOTO  
+
16.0nm  
QUICK  
ROUTE  
NEAR  
SRVC  
PORT  
PUNTA CORNACCHIA  
ACCO AMENO  
ISCHIA  
PORTO  
CASAMICCIOLA  
CANCEL  
GOTO  
I. ISCHIA  
Plotter display  
3. Press the PORT or NEAR SRVC soft key depending on objective. PORT  
shows a list of ports in your area. NEAR SRVC displays the port service list.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
PORT & SERVICE  
SELECT PORT & SRVC  
L
ACCIAROLI  
ACQUAMORTA  
AGNONE S. NICOLA  
AGROPOLI  
AMALFI  
BAIA  
CAPRI  
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA  
TM  
Port list (NavChart , Italy)  
PORT & SERVICE  
WC  
L
Port services (NavChartTM)  
Port services (C-MAP)  
Port services and sample port list  
4. 4. If you selected PORT (NavCharts™ only) at step 3, use the trackball to  
select a port, then press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft  
keys, then push the [ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to that port,  
simply press the ADD QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)  
If you selected NEAR SRVC at step 3, select service mark desired with the  
trackball and then push the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Then, the  
display shows the locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below  
shows the location of filling stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the  
trackball to place the “hand cursor” on the port service icon desired, then  
press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the  
[ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected, simply press  
the ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob.)  
40°45.971'N  
13°57.462'E  
0.26 nm  
180.2°M  
FROM  
OS  
GOTO  
+
16.0nm  
ENTER  
PUNTRNACCHIA  
ACCO AMENO  
ISCHIA  
PORTO  
CASAMICCIOLA  
CANCEL  
GOTO  
I. ISCHIA  
Sample filling station locations (southern Italy)  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.10.4 Following a route  
Selecting the route to follow  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.  
4. Select a route.  
5. Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the  
route waypoint nearest own ship.  
GOTO  
ROUTE  
1.3 nm  
208.5°M  
FROM  
OS  
WPT  
FISH  
16.0 nm  
WP-002  
GOTO  
WPT  
FISH  
RVRSE  
ROUTE  
WP-001  
RETURN  
CRAB  
Plotter display, route selected as destination  
6. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route  
from where to start navigating the route.  
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action  
taken at step 6.  
A solid line runs between own ship and the first route waypoint and all other  
route waypoints are connected with a dashed line. (For the 1722C/1723C series,  
those lines are colored light-blue and green, respectively.) The arrows on the  
lines show the direction to traverse the route.  
Navigating route waypoints in reverse order  
1. Do the steps 1 to 5 in the above.  
2. Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key to navigate waypoints in reverse order.  
The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Restarting navigation  
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your  
intended course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return  
to the original course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in  
the figure below. In these cases, use the restart function to restart navigation.  
Line 2  
Line 1  
Obstacle  
Original course  
Example of when to restart navigation  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the LOG soft key.  
Destination waypoint (WPT name against bright background)  
Passed waypoint (gray characters)  
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination  
LOG  
ETA 23:59 11.FEB  
LEG  
29.9°  
01  
001WPT  
RE-  
START  
Replaced by  
"FOLLOW LEG"  
when selecting  
a route leg.  
34°44.111'N  
135°21.134'W  
12.0nm  
02  
003WPT  
STOP  
34°43.432'N  
135°41.456'W  
159.9°  
6.00nm  
03 002WPT  
34°14.124'N  
RVRSE  
135°21.567'W  
50.5°  
Replaces triangle  
when selecting a  
route leg.  
29.8nm  
04  
005WPT  
34°44.569'N  
135°21.152'W  
359.9°  
3.0nm  
SPEED  
05  
008WPT  
34°54.124'N  
135°21.888'W  
COORD  
TYPE  
Log display  
4. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is  
selected the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.  
5. Press the RESTART soft key, or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.  
Note: Navigation may be restarted from the plotter display, with the  
RESTART key, when a single quick point (QP<01>) is selected for  
navigation.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Setting speed for ETA calculation  
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate  
ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) to a waypoint.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the LOG soft key.  
4. Press the SPEED soft key.  
SPEED FOR ETA  
▲
SPD 010.0kt  
GPS AVG. SPEED  
▲
Select speed for ETA window  
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable)  
by selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Switching waypoints  
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint  
three ways: perpendicular to waypoint, arrival alarm circle and manual.  
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat  
enters the arrival alarm range or the boat passes an imaginary perpendicular line  
passing through the center of the destination waypoint.  
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat  
enters the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see paragraph  
3.11.2 Arrival alarm.  
MANUAL: When the boat nears a destination waypoint, the destination waypoint  
may be manually switched by using the RESTART soft key. This function is  
operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the GOTO method (see page 3-45).  
WPT 2  
WPT 2  
Waypoint switched  
at this point.  
Waypoint switched  
at this point.  
WPT 1  
Arrival Alarm Circle  
WPT 1  
Perpendicular  
How waypoints are switched in perpendicular and arrival alarm circle  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
To select waypoint switching method do the following:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.  
3. Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select appropriate waypoint switching method;  
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Canceling route navigation  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.  
3. Press the LOG soft key.  
4. Press the STOP soft key.  
5. Push the [ENTER] knob.  
6. Press the RELEASE soft key.  
7. Push the [ENTER] knob.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11 Alarms  
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker  
icon appears (in red on the 1722C/1723C series). Press the [CLEAR] key to  
silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm  
menu display.  
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed  
by pressing the [ALARM] key. For 1722C/1723C series, note that the alarm icon  
is red when an alarm setting is violated. The color does not change when  
another alarm is violated later.  
AUDIO ALARM  
INTERNAL BUZZ  
ARRIVAL ALARM  
OFF 0.010nm  
BOTTOM ALARM  
OFF  
TEMPERATURE ALARM  
ALARM1  
ALARM2  
EDIT  
EDIT  
OFF  
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM  
OFF 0.010nm  
PROXIMITY ALARM  
OFF  
NEXT  
PAGE  
XTE ALARM  
CLEAR  
ALARM  
OFF 0.050nm  
SPEED ALARM  
OFF  
PREV.  
PAGE  
NEXT  
PAGE  
PREV..  
PAGE  
TRIP ALARM  
OFF 0000.0nm  
RETURN  
ALARM INFOMATION  
NO ALARM  
ALARM INFOMATION  
NO ALARM  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Plotter alarm menu  
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off  
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You  
can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.  
AUDIO ALARM  
INT & EXT BUZZ  
INTERNAL BUZZ  
OFF  
Audio alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),  
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio  
alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11.2 Arrival alarm  
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination  
waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you  
approach from the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat  
enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is active a dashed circle (red on the  
MODEL1722C/1723C series) marks the arrival alarm area.  
Alarm  
range  
Own ship  
: Alarm area  
Destination  
waypoint  
How the arrival alarm works  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ARRIVAL ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.  
ARRIVAL ALARM  
L
ON 0.010nm  
OFF  
L
Arrival alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.  
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to  
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available arrival alarm  
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm  
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be  
at rest. When the anchor watch is active, a dashed circle (red on the  
MODEL1722C/1723C series) with an “X” at its center marks the anchor watch  
area.  
Alarm  
setting  
Your ship's position where  
you start the anchor watch  
alarm.  
: Alarm  
area  
How the anchor watch alarm works  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.  
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM  
L
ON 0.050nm  
OFF  
L
Anchor watch alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.  
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to  
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available anchor  
watch range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm  
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the  
XTE alarm is active two dashed lines (red on the MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
mark the XTE alarm area.  
Own ship  
position  
Destination  
waypoint  
Alarm  
setting  
Intended  
course  
: Alarm  
How the XTE alarm works  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select XTE ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.  
XTE ALARM  
L
ON 0.050nm  
OFF  
L
XTE alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.  
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to  
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available XTE alarm  
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3.11.5 Speed alarm  
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within, over/under or under  
the speed range set.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select SPEED ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm window.  
SPEED ALARM  
L
WITHIN  
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt  
UNDER/OVER  
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt  
OFF  
L
Speed alarm window  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN, OVER/UNDER, or OFF.  
5. For WITHIN and OVER/UNDER, use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to  
enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set  
value.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3.11.6 Proximity alarm  
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is  
marked with the proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that  
waypoint on the waypoint list. When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity  
alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The proximity mark remains on the screen until  
the waypoint is erased. (Note that the MODEL1722C/1723C series show the  
proximity mark and dashed circle in red.)  
Radius in proportion to  
proximity alarm radius,  
which is set on waypoint list  
001WPT  
Proximity mark  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select PROXIMITY ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm window.  
PROXIMITY ALARM  
L
ON  
OFF  
L
Proximity alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11.7 Trip alarm  
The trip alarm informs you when you traveled a certain distance.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select TRIP ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.  
TRIP ALARM  
L
ON 0000.0nm  
OFF  
L
Trip alarm window  
4. Select ON with the cursor.  
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to  
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
7. Press the Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.11.8 Alarm information  
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker  
icon appears (in red on the color model). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the  
alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display. In  
the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the  
ALARM INFORMATION window.  
AUDIO ALARM  
INT & EXT BUZZ  
ALARM1  
ARRIVAL ALARM  
ON 0.010nm  
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM  
OFF 0.010nm  
PROXIMITY ALARM  
OFF  
EDIT  
NEXT  
INFO  
XTE ALARM  
CLEAR  
ALARM  
OFF 0.050nm  
SPEED ALARM  
OFF  
NEXT  
PAGE  
TRIP ALARM  
OFF 0000.0nm  
RETURN  
ALARM INFOMATION  
ARRIVED  
AT WAYPOINT.  
Alarm information  
window  
CONTINUE  
Speaker icon  
Means multiple alarms  
have been violated.  
Alarm menu)  
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the  
alarm if it was not already silenced with the [CLEAR] key.) For the color  
model, the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon  
remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is eliminated or the alarm  
is disabled.  
Note: If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE  
appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case  
press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been  
violated.  
3. Press the [ALARM] key to close the alarm menu.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
Alarm messages  
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings  
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings  
Message  
ARRIVED AT XXX WAYPOINT!  
(XXX = waypoint number)  
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE  
AREA!  
Meaning  
Arrival alarm violated.  
Proximity alarm violated.  
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH  
LIMIT!  
Anchor watch alarm violated.  
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT!  
SPEED ALARM!  
TEMPERATURE ALARM!  
XTE alarm violated.  
Speed alarm violated.  
Water temperature alarm  
violated.  
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE  
EXCEEDED  
Trip alarm violated.  
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance  
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip  
distance to zero as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in  
that order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.  
GENERAL  
SETUP1  
KEY BEEP  
ON  
LANGUAGE  
EDIT  
ENGLISH  
RANGE UNIT  
nm, kt  
TEMPERATURE UNIT  
NEXT  
PAGE  
F
DEPTH UNIT  
RETURN  
ft  
TEMPERATURE SOURCE  
NMEA  
DEPTH SOURCE  
NMEA  
RESET TRIP LOG  
NO  
General setup menu, page 1  
3. Use the cursor pad to select RESET TRIP LOG and press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select YES.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
3.13 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as  
Destination  
The MOB (Man Overboard) mark functions to mark man overboard position. You  
can inscribe this mark from any mode, except while playing back data or  
conducting a self-test. Note that this function requires position data.  
MOB  
mark  
M
(MOB)  
Range, bearing  
M
162.5°  
O
Current  
position  
Man  
overboad  
0.49 nm  
B
MOB Data Box  
Bearing and range  
to MOB position  
MOB concept  
1. Press and hold down the [SAVE/MOB] key for about three seconds when  
someone falls onboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved  
(youngest empty waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB  
confirmation window.  
Time remaining is counted down while pressing the [SAVE/MOB] key.  
WAYPOINT SAVED!  
MAN OVER BOARD!  
GO TO MOB?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
CONTINUE PUSHING  
FOR MOB!  
XXXWPT  
CONTINUE PUSHING  
FOR MOB!  
XX SEC  
XX = Time remaining is counted down.  
XXX = Waypoint number  
MOB mark messages  
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or  
press the [CLEAR] key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If  
you select the MOB position as destination;  
• A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay (color model only) appears depending on  
the display in use.  
• The MOB mark “M” appears at the MOB position and a line runs between it  
and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.  
• Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.  
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its  
corresponding waypoint because that there are normal waypoint and MOB mark  
at the same position. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the  
[CLEAR] key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint. Then,  
repeat to erase the MOB mark.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PLOTTER OPERATION  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
With connection of the optional network sounder you can show video sounder  
images on the display.  
4.1  
Principle of Operation  
The video sounder determines the distance between its transducer and  
underwater objects such as fish, lake bottom or seabed and displays the results  
on screen. It does this by utilizing the fact that an ultrasonic wave transmitted  
through water travels at a nearly constant speed of 4800 feet (1500 meters) per  
second. When a sound wave strikes an underwater object such as fish or sea  
bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected back toward the source (transducer).  
Thus by calculating the time difference between the transmission of a sound  
wave and the reception of the reflected sound wave, the depth to the object can  
be determined.  
The entire process begins in the network sounder. Transmitter power is sent to  
the transducer as a short pulse of electrical energy. The electrical signal  
produced by the transmitter is converted into an ultrasonic signal by the  
transducer and transmitted into the water. Any returning signals from intervening  
objects (such as a fish school) are received by the transducer and converted into  
an electrical signal. The signals are then amplified in the amplifier section, and  
finally, displayed on screen.  
The picture displayed is made up of a series of vertical scan lines, one for each  
transmission. Each line represents a snapshot of what has occurred beneath the  
boat. A series of snapshots are accumulated side by side across the screen, and  
the resulting contours of the bottom and fish between the bottom and surface  
are displayed.  
0
-
-
-
-
50  
-
-
-
-
100  
-
-
-
-
Underwater conditions and video sounder display  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.2  
Sounder Displays  
4.2.1  
Selecting a sounder display  
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single  
frequency, marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and  
A-scope  
To select a display;  
1. Press the [DISP] key and select a sounder display.  
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.  
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.  
DISPLAY MODE  
DUAL FREQ  
SINGLE FREQ  
MARKER ZOOM  
BOTTOM ZOOM  
BOTTOM LOCK  
BOTTOM DSCRM  
HF: 200.0 kHz  
LF: 50.0 kHz  
Display mode window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select a display.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.  
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the  
ENTER knob to register setting and close the window.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.2.2  
Description of sounder displays  
Single frequency display  
Display mode  
Variable Range Marker (white)  
Depth scale  
Time  
Soft keys  
Minute marker  
0
0'30"  
SOUNDER  
SINGLE  
Zero line  
Icons  
S
I
M
(alarm, battery,  
simulation)  
F
SHIFT  
50  
52  
50  
Color bar  
AUTO/  
D. BOX  
Fish  
echo  
40  
Cross-hair  
cursor  
Temp.  
scale  
FREQ  
LF /HF  
100  
30  
(orange)  
DISPLY  
MODE  
Water  
temp.  
graph  
150  
Water  
temp.  
display  
114  
200  
LF  
Bottom echo  
Tx frequency  
Depth  
Indications on the single frequency display  
Note 1: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water  
temperature sensor. It can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE  
GRAPH on the SOUNDER menu.  
Note 2: When using the vertically split plotter/sounder display with dual  
frequency or zoom display, the depth scale for the left sounder screen is  
not displayed. Further, a last digit on the depth may be overlapped by  
the line which splits screens.  
Selecting transmission frequency  
The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF  
(high frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ  
LF/HF soft key to select “LF” or “HF”.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
Dual-frequency display  
The dual-frequency display provides both 50 kHz and 200 kHz pictures. This  
display is useful for comparing the same picture with two different sounding  
frequencies.  
0.0  
LF  
HF  
Dual-frequency display  
LF picture  
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower the  
frequency of the pulse, the wider the detection area. Therefore, the low  
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.  
HF picture  
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution.  
Therefore, the high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.  
low frequency  
high frequency  
Sounding area and transmission frequency  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
Marker-zoom display  
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture  
to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the  
portion to expand by operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can  
shift with the [ENTER] knob. The area between the VRM and zoom marker is  
expanded. The length of the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.  
Fish school  
0'20"  
-
-
-
0
42  
44  
-
-
-
-
Fish  
school  
VRM  
42.0  
(White on color model)  
50  
46  
This part  
is zoomed.  
-
-
-
-
-
48  
50  
-
-
100  
-
80  
HF  
Zoom marker  
-
MARKER-ZOOM  
DISPLAY  
NORMAL  
DISPLAY  
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display  
Bottom-zoom display  
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom  
range selected on the sounder range setup menu (see paragraph 5.9.3). A  
bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.  
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.  
0
40  
-
20.0  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50  
50  
-
-
-
-
Zoom marker  
Bottom  
-
-
-
-
100  
60  
-
-
HF  
-
80  
-
BOTTOM-ZOOM NORMAL DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
Bottom-lock display  
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half  
of the screen and a 3 or 6 meter (10 or 20 feet) wide layer in contact with the  
bottom is expanded onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for  
discriminating bottom fish from the bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock  
range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu. For details, see paragraph  
5.9.3.  
0
-
-
20  
-
Zoom marker  
This part  
-
15  
-
is zoomed.  
-
50  
-
60  
-
-
-
-
-
Fish  
school  
10  
10  
-
100  
80  
-
5
HF  
-
BOTTOM-LOCK NORMAL DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display  
Bottom discrimination display  
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine  
bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a  
soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.  
-
-
-
4
20.0  
-
-
-
-
-
2
-
-
-
Zoom marker  
50  
-
Bottom trail  
0
Long tail=Hard bottom  
Short tail=Soft bottom  
-
100  
-
50  
-
-
-
80  
HF  
BOTTOM  
NORMAL DISPLAY  
DISCRIMINATION  
DISPLAY  
Bottom discrimination display  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
A-scope display (display only)  
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission  
with amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right of the  
screen. It is useful for estimating fish species and seabed composition. To turn  
on the A-scope display, press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode  
desired, then press the A-SCPE soft key to turn the A-scope display on or off as  
appropriate. For the mode except SINGLE MODE the screen must be split  
horizontally to show the A-scope presentation.  
0
-
-
-
A-scope Display  
-
No response  
50  
-
-
-
-
Weak echo (fish)  
Strong echo (bottom)  
100  
-
-
84  
HF  
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE  
DISPLAY  
A-scope display  
4.2.3  
Selecting screen split method in combination displays  
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or  
horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.  
0.0  
0.0  
SPLIT  
/
HF  
SPLIT  
/
LF  
HF  
LF  
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.3  
Automatic Sounder Operation  
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other  
tasks and do not have the time to adjust the display.  
4.3.1  
How the automatic sounder works  
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range  
scale and clutter suppression level according to depth. It works as follows:  
• Range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of screen.  
The range jumps to one step shallower range when bottom echoes reach a  
half way point of the full scale from top and to one step deeper range when  
they come to the lower edge of the scale.  
• The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown  
(default color arrangement).  
• Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.  
4.3.2  
4.3.3  
Types of automatic sounder modes  
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING.  
CRUISING is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools.  
CRUISING uses a higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not  
recommended for fish detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter  
suppression circuit.  
How to enable automatic sounder operation  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.  
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.  
AUTO MODE  
L
CRUISING  
FISHING  
OFF (MANUAL)  
L
Auto mode window  
3. Use the cursor pad to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.  
4. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.4  
Manual Sounder Operation  
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using fixed gain  
setting.  
The gain, range and range shifting functions used together give you the means  
to select the depth you can see on screen.  
4.4.1  
4.4.2  
Selecting the manual mode  
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.  
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the auto mode window.  
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).  
4. Press the RETURN soft key.  
Selecting display range  
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in  
feet, meters, fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that range cannot be  
changed in the automatic sounder mode.  
Default sounder ranges  
Range 1  
15 ft  
Range 2  
30 ft  
Range 3 Range 4 Range 5  
Range 6  
400 ft  
Range 7  
1000 ft  
300 m  
Range 8  
60 ft  
20 m  
10 fa  
120 ft  
40 m  
20 fa  
200 ft  
80 m  
40 fa  
1200 ft  
1500 ft  
4500 m  
900 fa  
5 m  
10 m  
5 fa  
150 m  
80 fa  
4000 m  
650 fa  
3 fa  
150 fa  
3 PB  
5 PB  
10 PB  
30 PB  
50 PB  
100 PB  
200 PB  
700 P/B 900 P/B  
4.4.3  
Adjusting the gain  
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on  
screen. Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for  
shallow waters.  
Gain too high  
Gain proper  
Gain too low  
Examples of proper and improper gain  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
Press the [GAIN] key to show the gain window, and rotate the [ENTER] knob to  
set the gain. Current level is shown on the bar. Press the RETURN key to finish.  
The setting range is 0-100.  
GAIN  
HF  
27  
     
HIGH  
LOW  
     
Gain window  
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF  
and HF. Use the FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which  
to adjust gain.  
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message  
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is  
displayed when you attempt to do so.  
4.4.4  
Range shifting  
The basic range can be thought of as providing a “window” into the water column  
and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired depth. The basic range  
may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT soft key followed  
by adjusting the [+ RANGE -] key. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.  
Shift  
Shift concept  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.5  
Measuring Depth, Time  
The VRM functions to measure the depth, and the time cursor measures time.  
1. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise the shift it  
downward, clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the cursor pad to  
shift the VRM, in which case use ▲ or ▼.  
2. Use ◄ or ► on the cursor pad to shift the cross-hair cursor to measure the  
elapsed time.  
Time to cursor intersection  
(Max. 99'59")  
Depth to VRM  
0
0'33"  
28.8  
VRM  
-
-
-
-
Cross-hair  
cursor  
50  
-
-
-
-
100  
-
84  
LF  
-
How to use the VRM, time cursor  
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication  
and depth scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor  
slightly to show them completely. Further, when the display is shifted, the  
depth scale may obscure the time indication.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.6  
Reducing Interference  
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic  
equipment on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.  
Interference from  
other sounder  
Electrical inteference  
Types of interference  
To reduce interference, do the following:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter  
window.  
NOISE LIMITER  
L
OFF  
LOW  
MEDIUM  
HIGH  
L
Noise limiter window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM,  
HIGH) or turn the noise limiter off.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Turn the noise limiter function off when no interference exists, otherwise weak  
echoes may be missed.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.7  
Reducing Low Level Noise  
Dots (light-blue on the color model) may appear over most of the screen. This is  
mainly due to sediment in the water or noise. This noise can be suppressed by  
adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER menu.  
Appearance of clutter  
When the sounder mode is Auto, the clutter suppression setting is fixed at AUTO.  
To reduce low level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select CLUTTER and press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.  
CLUTTER  
L
00  
L
Clutter window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select clutter rejection level desired; 0 (OFF) through  
16, default setting, 9. The higher the number the higher the degree of  
suppression. Note that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes.  
Therefore, turn off the clutter when its use is not required.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce echo colors.  
However, if you do not wish to change the relation between weak and  
strong echoes, use signal level instead.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.8  
Erasing Weak Echoes  
Sediment in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display  
in green or light blue (color display) or “spots” on the background (monochrome  
display). These weak echoes may be erased as below.  
Weak  
echoes  
Appearance of weak echoes  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level  
window.  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
OFF  
SL1  
SL2  
SL3  
SL4  
SL5  
SL6  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
OFF  
SL1  
SL2  
SL3  
OFF  
SL1  
SL2  
8-color display  
Monochrome display  
16-color display  
Signal level window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The  
higher the number the stronger the echo that will be erased.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces echo colors. Therefore if you do not  
wish to reduce echo colors use clutter instead.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.9  
White Marker (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For  
example, you may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish  
echoes near the bottom.  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select WHITE MARKER, and press the EDIT soft key to open the white  
marker window.  
WHITE MARKER  
LLLLL  
OFF  
LLLLL  
White marker window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select color to display in white. As you use the cursor  
pad, the number (corresponds to echo number) in the marker window  
changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar shifts and selected echo  
color is displayed in white.  
White marker shows  
color currently  
displayed in white.  
←
Echo strength bar (16 color) when white marker function is active  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.10 Picture Advance Speed  
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run  
across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a  
fast advance speed will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the  
screen and a slow advance speed will contract it.  
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s  
speed.  
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture  
advance window.  
PICTURE ADVANCE  
L
2/1  
1/1  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
1/16  
STOP  
L
Picture advance window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select speed desired. The functions in the window  
denote the number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example,  
1/8 means one scan line is produced every eight transmissions. STOP  
freezes the display and it is convenient for observing an echo.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: For the C-MAP specification unit, when using the plotter/sounder  
combination display, advancement of the sounder picture may be  
temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its  
display range is being changed.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed  
With speed data provided by a speed measuring device, picture advance speed  
may be automatically synchronized with ship’s speed. As shown in the figure  
below the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced with the speed  
dependent picture advance mode active, thus it permits judgment of fish school  
size and abundance at any speed.  
Fish school shrinks as speed  
is increased; expanded  
as speed is decreased.  
Normal Mode  
Same size  
fish schools  
HALF  
SPEED  
FULL  
SPEED  
Fish schools are shown  
same size regardless  
of ship’s speed.  
Speed  
Actual Movement  
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode  
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works  
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
2. Select PRR LEVEL.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.  
4. Use the cursor pad to select SPD SENSING PRR.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Note: Use the same speed data (SOG or STW) throughout the network for  
smooth advancement of the sounder picture.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.11 Display Colors (MODEL1722C/1723C series)  
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select HUE, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.  
HUE  
LLLL  
1
LLLL  
Hue window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You  
can see the result of your selection on the display.)  
Hue no. and background and echo colors  
Hue No.  
Echo Color  
16 color  
Background Color  
Blue  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8 color  
16 color  
8 color  
16 color  
8 color  
16 color  
8 color  
Blue  
Dark blue  
Dark blue  
White  
White  
Black  
Black  
Monochrome, eight intensities  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.12 Alarms  
The sounder section has five conditions which generate visual and aural alarms:  
bottom alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water  
temperature alarm (temperature sensor required). For 1722C/1723C series, note  
that the alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to  
background color when the [CLEAR] key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed.  
The color does not change when another alarm is violated.  
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be  
displayed by pressing the [ALARM] key.  
SOUNDER  
ALARM  
AUDIO ALARM  
INTERNAL BUZZ  
BOTTOM ALARM  
EDIT  
OFF  
TEMPERATURE ALARM  
OFF  
FISH ALARM  
CLEAR  
ALARM  
OFF  
FISH ALARM (B/L)  
OFF  
RETURN  
ALARM INFOMATION  
NO ALARM  
Sounder alarm menu  
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off  
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable  
or disable the audio alarm as follows:  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.  
AUDIO ALARM  
INT & EXT BUZZ  
INTERNAL BUZZ  
OFF  
Audio alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),  
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio alarm  
for all modes globally, including radar.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.12.2 Bottom alarm  
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set.  
To activate the bottom alarm the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom  
alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm  
menu.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select BOTTOM ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.  
BOTTOM ALARM  
L
ON  
0000.0-0000.0 ft  
OFF  
L
Bottom alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm  
range with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob: Use ◄ or ► to select digit;  
rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4.12.3 Fish alarm  
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note  
that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM  
SETUP menu.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select FISH ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.  
FISH ALARM  
L
ON  
0000.0-0000.0 ft  
OFF  
L
Fish alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the  
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select  
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L)  
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined  
distance from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on  
the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select FISH ALARM (B/L).  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.  
FISH ALARM (B/L)  
L
ON  
0000.0-0000.0 ft  
OFF  
L
Fish alarm (B/L) window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the  
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select  
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm  
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF  
RANGE. The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is  
within the range set, the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water  
temperature is higher or lower than the range set. This alarm requires water  
temperature data.  
Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the  
water temperature alarm on the plotter alarm menu.  
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.  
2. Use the cursor pad to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.  
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.  
TEMPERATURE ALARM  
L
WITHIN RANGE  
-000.0 - +000.0°F  
OUT OF RANGE  
-000.0 - +000.0°F  
OFF  
L
Water temperature alarm window  
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as  
appropriate. For WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE, use the cursor pad  
and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate  
the [ENTER] knob to set value.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.  
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated...  
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker  
icon appears (in red on the color model). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the  
alarm. For color models, press the [ALARM] key, CLEAR ALARM soft key to  
change the speaker icon from red to black. You can see which alarm has been  
violated on the alarm menu display. In the example below the fish alarm has  
been violated.  
To see which alarm(s) has been violated;  
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The offending alarm is shown in the ALARM  
INFORMATION window.  
SOUNDER  
ALARM  
AUDIO ALARM  
INTERNAL BUZZ  
BOTTOM ALARM  
EDIT  
OFF  
TEMPERATURE ALARM  
OFF  
FISH ALARM  
CLEAR  
ALARM  
0020.0-0030.0ft  
FISH ALARM (B/L)  
OFF  
RETURN  
Alarm information  
window  
ALARM INFOMATION  
FISH ALARM!  
Speaker icon  
Sounder alarm menu  
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the  
buzzer if it was not already silenced with the [CLEAR] key.) For the color  
model, the speaker icon changes from red to background color on the color  
model and changes to normal video on the monochrome model. The speaker  
icon remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated.  
Note: If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE  
appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case  
press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been  
violated.  
3. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
Alarm messages  
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings  
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings  
Message  
Meaning  
DEPTH ALARM!  
FISH ALARM!  
Bottom alarm violated.  
Fish alarm violated.  
TEMPERATURE ALARM!  
Water temperature alarm violated.  
4.13 Water Temperature Graph  
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water  
temperature on the sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be  
turned on or off as below.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.  
5. Press the ENTER soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
4.14 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate  
Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used.  
When in shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface  
and actual bottom echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD  
SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode, where the PRR  
changes automatically with ship’s speed (required speed input.) For further  
information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page 4-17.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.  
3. Press the cursor pad to select PRR LEVEL.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select he rate for repetition.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a  
problem to search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear  
on the display.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display  
4.15.1 Zero line  
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the  
transducer’s position.  
Zero line  
Shift  
Zero line  
4.15.2 Bottom echo  
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in  
reddish-brown (color model) or darkest tone (monochrome model) but the color  
(tone on the monochrome model) and width will vary with bottom composition,  
water depth, frequency, sensitivity, etc.  
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or  
sometimes a third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between  
them below the first echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the  
bottom and the surface twice or more in shallow depths.  
The color (tone for monochrome model) of the bottom echo can be used to help  
determine the density of the bottom materials (soft or hard). The harder the  
bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a single bottom echo  
on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return. The range  
should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when  
bottom hardness is being determined.  
Rock base  
Intensity difference  
in water depth  
Mud and sand  
Second bottom  
echo  
Bottom echoes  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION  
4.15.3 Fish school echoes  
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the  
bottom. Usually the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo  
because its reflection property is much smaller compared to the bottom. The size  
of the fish school can be ascertained from the density of the display.  
Large  
school  
Small  
school  
Size of  
fish school  
Fish school echoes  
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration  
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may  
appear near the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to  
running into a brick wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar  
noise sometimes appears when a water temperature difference (thermocline)  
exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer different temperature zones, so the  
thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish. 200 kHz tends to show  
shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.  
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air  
bubbles obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a  
quick turn or reverses movement. However, reconsideration of the transducer  
installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs frequently.  
Surface noise  
Caused by aerated  
water  
Thermocline  
Surface noise/aeration  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to  
suit your needs. For mode specific menus, e.g. radar plotter and sounder, make  
sure that you select the appropriate display when making changes or viewing  
menu option.  
5.1  
General Setup  
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar  
and sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you  
may display from any mode. These items include data, position and time formats,  
units of measurement, data sources, etc.  
1. Show the any display and press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.  
GENERAL  
SETUP 2  
GENERAL  
SETUP 1  
KEY BEEP  
ON  
LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
RANGE UNIT  
nm, kt  
LAT/LON DISPLAY  
DD° MM.MMM'  
TD DISPLAY  
LORAN C  
EDIT  
EDIT  
SPEED  
SOG  
TEMPERATURE UNIT  
POSITION DISPLAY  
LAT/LON  
TIME DISPLAY  
24 HOURS  
INFRARED REMOTE MODE  
A
RANGE & BEARING MODE  
RHUMB LINE  
°C  
DEPTH UNIT  
ft  
TEMPERATURE SOURCE  
NMEA  
DEPTH SOURCE  
NMEA  
RESET TRIP LOG  
NO  
NEXT  
PAGE  
PREV.  
PAGE  
RETURN  
BEARING READOUT  
MAGNETIC  
SPEED SOURCE  
NMEA  
MAGNETIC VARIATION  
AUTO 7.0° W  
DISPLAY MODE*  
*
DAY  
*: MODEL1722 series only  
Page 1  
Page 2 (MODEL1722 series)  
General setup menu  
4. Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if  
necessary.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select item.  
6. Press the EDIT soft key.  
7. Use the cursor pad to select option desired and press the ENTER soft key or  
[ENTER] knob.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of general menu  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Key Beep  
Language  
Turns key operation beep on/off.  
Chooses menu language.  
On, Off  
On  
English, French, German,  
English  
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish  
Range Unit  
Chooses unit of range and speed measurement.  
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm nm, kt  
& yd, kt; nm & m, kt; km & m,  
km/h; sm & yd, mph  
Temperature Unit Chooses unit of water temperature measurement. °C, °F  
°F  
Depth Unit  
Chooses unit of depth measurement.  
ft, m, fa, PB (Passi/Braza)  
ft  
Temperature  
Source  
Chooses source of water temperature data.  
ETR (network sounder), NMEA NMEA  
Depth Source  
Reset Trip Log  
Speed Source  
Lat/Lon Display  
Chooses source of depth data.  
Resets distance run.  
ETR, NMEA.  
Yes, No  
NMEA  
No  
Chooses source of own ship’s speed data.  
ETR, NMEA  
NMEA  
Chooses how many digits (or seconds) to display  
after decimal point in latitude and longitude  
position.  
DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,  
DD°MM.MMMM’,  
DD°MM’SS.S”  
DD°MM.MMMM’  
TD Display  
Speed  
Chooses TD type.  
Loran C, Decca  
Loran C  
SOG  
Chooses speed format to display.  
SOG (Speed over ground),  
STW (Speed through water)  
Position Display  
Time Display  
Chooses position display format.  
Chooses time notation.  
LAT/LON, TD  
LAT/LON  
24 hours  
A
12 hours, 24 hours  
Infrared Remote  
Mode  
A remote controller can be set exclusively A, B, C, D  
for use with a specific display unit, in the  
case of multiple NavNet display units. For  
further details see the Installation Manual.  
Range & Bearing Chooses how to calculate range and bearing.  
Mode  
Rhumb Line: Straight line  
drawn between two points on a  
nautical chart.  
Rhumb Line  
Great Circle: Shortest course  
between two points on the  
surface of the earth.  
Bearing Readout Chooses bearing display format for course, course True, Magnetic  
over ground and cursor bearing.  
Magnetic  
Auto  
Magnetic  
Variation  
The magnetic variations for all areas of the earth  
are preprogrammed into this unit. The  
preprogrammed variation is accurate for most  
instances, however you may wish to manually  
enter a variation. For manual input, select Manual,  
hit the EDIT soft key, enter value and hit the  
ENTER soft key to finish. “AUTO” requires position  
data.  
Auto, Manual  
Display Mode  
(Monochrome  
model)  
Reverses background (black) and foreground  
(white) colors.  
Day, Night  
Day  
*Select ETR to show water temperature/depth data fed from the network sounder, and then set the TEMP  
and DEPTH CALIBRATION of the SENSOR SETUP in the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.2  
Radar Setup  
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your  
operational needs. Be sure to show the radar display before executing any of the  
procedures.  
5.2.1  
Radar display setup  
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu,  
which contains items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.  
1. Show the radar display, and press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.  
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.  
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
EBL REFERENCE  
RELATIVE  
EBL REFERENCE  
RELATIVE  
CURSOR POSITION  
CURSOR POSITION  
EDIT  
EDIT  
RNG & BRG-REL  
TUNING  
AUTO  
TX SECTOR BLANKING  
OFF 000 001  
NOISE REJECTION  
OFF  
RNG & BRG-REL  
TUNING  
AUTO  
TX SECTOR BLANKING  
OFF  
DATA  
BOX  
D.BOX  
NOISE REJECTION  
OFF  
BACKGROUND COLOR  
BLACK  
WATCHMAN TIME  
5 minutes  
ECHO COLOR  
YELLOW  
RANGE UNIT  
nm  
WATCHMAN TIME  
5 minutes  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RANGE UNIT  
nm  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Radar display setup menu  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of radar setting menu  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
EBL  
References EBL bearing, shown in the  
True, Relative  
Relative  
Reference  
EBL data box, to North (True) or heading (True only for north-up,  
(Relative)  
course-up and true  
motion mode)  
Cursor  
Position  
Chooses how to display cursor position.  
LAT/LON: Lat/Long  
position of cursor  
TD: Loran C or Decca  
TDs  
RNG & BRG-REL  
RNG & BRG-REL:  
Range and bearing  
referenced to ship’s  
heading  
RNG & BRG-TRUE  
Range and bearing  
referenced to North.  
Tuning  
Selects receiver tuning method. For  
further details see “2.3 Tuning.”  
Auto, Manual  
Auto  
Off  
TX Sector  
Blanking  
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which  
shows area where no echoes are  
transmitted. Set the blanking area.  
On, Off  
Noise  
Rejection  
Electrical noise, appearing on the screen Off, Low, High  
as “speckles,” may be suppressed with  
Low  
the noise rejector. Note that some forms  
of interference cannot be suppressed.  
Background  
Color  
Chooses colors of background, range  
rings and characters. Effective only when Background: Black  
Black/Green  
Black/Green  
(Color model) HUE soft key is set for “MANUAL.”  
Rings: Green  
Characters: Green  
Black/Red  
Background: Black  
Rings: Green  
Characters: Red  
Blue/White  
Background: Dark Blue  
Rings: White  
Characters: White  
DK Blue/White  
Background: Dark Blue  
Rings: White  
Characters: White  
White/Green  
Background: White  
Rings: Green  
Characters: Green  
(Echoes in white)  
(Continued on next page)  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of radar setting menu (con’t from previous page)  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Chooses echo color.  
Echo Color  
Yellow, Green,  
Green  
(Color model)  
Multi (Echoes shown in  
red, yellow or green in  
order of descending  
strength.)  
Sets watchman stand-by period. For  
further details see paragraph 2.23  
Watchman.  
Watchman  
Time  
5, 10, 20 minutes  
5 minutes  
nm  
Sets unit of range measurement.  
Range Unit  
nm, km, sm  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.2.2  
Radar range setup  
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE  
SETUP menu. (Available ranges depends on the network radar used.) After  
choosing the ranges desired change the range with the [RANGE] key to activate  
range settings.  
At least two ranges (excluding maximum range) must be turned on. When less  
than two ranges are turned on, you cannot escape from the range setup menu.  
Note that the previous setting returns to the default setting when you change the  
unit type.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.  
2. Press the RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE  
SETUP menu.  
RANGE  
SETUP  
RANGE  
SETUP  
0.125nm  
0.25nm  
0.5nm  
0.75nm  
1nm  
ON  
0.25km  
0.5km  
0.75km  
1km  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
1.5km  
2km  
1.5nm  
2nm  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
3km  
3nm  
4km  
OFF  
ON  
4nm  
OFF  
ON  
6km  
6nm  
8km  
OFF  
ON  
8nm  
OFF  
ON  
12km  
12nm  
16km  
24km  
36km  
48km  
64km  
72km  
OFF  
ON  
16nm  
24nm  
36nm  
48nm  
64nm  
72nm  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
RETURN  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm*  
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm*  
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.  
Range unit: nm Range unit: km  
Radar range setup menu  
3. Use the cursor pad to select the range which you want to turn on or off.  
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn the range on or off as appropriate.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key to register the setting.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Max. range  
MODEL1722/1722C/1723C  
MODEL1732/1732C/1733C  
MODEL1742/1742C  
MODEL1752/1752C/1753C  
MODEL1762/1762C/1763C  
24 nm  
36 nm  
24 km  
36 km  
36 nm  
48 nm  
36 km  
48 km  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.2.3  
Function key setup  
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default  
radar function key settings are as shown in the table below.  
Function Key  
Default Function  
Turn heading line off.  
Function Key Label  
1
2
3
4
5
HL  
Turn range rings on/off.  
Turn echo trail on/off.  
Turn display offcenter on/off.  
Select radar source.  
RNG  
TRL  
SFT  
RSR  
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.  
FUNC  
Function key  
setting  
KEY  
SOFT KEY 1  
HL: HDG LINE OFF  
EDIT  
Function  
key label  
H
L
SOFT KEY 2  
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF  
R
N
G
SOFT KEY 3  
TRL: ECHO TRAIL  
T
R
L
SOFT KEY 4  
SFT: OFFCENTER  
S
F
T
SOFT KEY 5  
RSR: RADAR SOURCE  
RETURN  
R
S
R
Radar function key menu  
3. Select the function key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key.  
SOF TKEY 1  
SOFT KEY 1  
TLL: TLL OUTPUT  
ALM: GUARD ALARM  
EBL: EBL  
OFF  
HL: HDG LINE OFF  
MOD: MODE  
Scroll  
down  
VRM: VRM  
GAI: GAIN  
TTM: TTM ON/OFF  
WMK: WPT ON/OFF  
WTM: WATCHMAN  
ACQ: ACQUISITION  
TX: STBY/TX  
SEA: A/C SEA  
RAI: A/C RAIN  
FTC: FTC  
ES: ECHO STRETCH  
PLS: PULSE LENGTH  
ZOM: ZOOM  
RSR: RADAR SOURCE  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL  
SFT: OFFCENTER  
TRL: ECHO TRAIL  
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF  
Radar function key options  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the  
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Radar function keys  
Menu Item  
Function  
Function Key Label  
OFF  
Assigns no function.  
—
HL  
HL: HDG LINE OFF  
MOD: MODE  
Turns heading line off.  
Selects presentation mode.  
MOD  
GAI  
SEA  
RAI  
FTC  
ES  
GAI: GAIN  
Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.  
Shows manual or A/C SEA adjustment window.  
Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.  
Displays FTC window. Adjust FTC with the [ENTER] knob.  
Turns echo stretch on/off.  
SEA: A/C SEA  
RAI: A/C RAIN  
FTC: FTC  
ES: ECHO STRETCH  
PLS: PULSE LENGTH  
ZOM: ZOOM  
Sets pulselength (long or short).  
PLS  
ZOM  
SFT  
Turns zoom on/off.  
SFT: OFFCENTER  
Press to shift display center to cursor location. Press again to  
turn shift off and return cursor to display center.  
TRL: ECHO TRAIL  
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF  
TLL: TLL OUTPUT  
ALM: GUARD ALARM  
EBL: EBL  
Starts/stops echo trails.  
TRL  
RNG  
TLL  
Turns range rings on/off.  
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to navigator.  
Displays alarm soft keys.  
ALM  
EBL  
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with each press.  
Switches control between VRM1and VRM2 with each press.  
Turns TTM (Tracked Target (Message) data on/off.  
Turns waypoint marker on/off.  
VRM: VRM  
VRM  
TTM  
WMK  
WTM  
ACQ  
TTM: TTM ON/OFF  
WMK: WPT ON/OFF  
WTM: WATCHMAN  
ACQ: ACQUISITION  
Turns watchman on/off.  
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.(Requires  
ARP-equipped Model 1833/1833C series network radar.)  
TX: STBY/TX  
Toggles between standby and transmit.  
Selects source for radar picture.  
TX  
RSR: RADAR SOURCE  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL*  
RSR  
DBX  
CHG  
Turns data boxes on/off.  
Changes display control in combination display.  
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all display for CHG.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.3  
Plotter Setup  
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter  
display.  
5.3.1  
Navigation options  
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the  
plotter setup menu.  
1. Show the plotter display and press the [MENU] key open the main menu.  
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.  
PLOTTER  
WAYPOINT SWITCHING  
SETUP  
ARRVL ALM CRCL  
COURSE VECTOR  
EDIT  
LINE  
SET GOTO METHOD  
1POINT  
D. BOX  
QP  
INTERNAL  
RETURN  
Display option menu  
Contents of display option menu  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Waypoints  
Switching  
Chooses waypoint switching method. See  
“switching waypoints” on page 3-51.  
Perpendicular, Arrvl  
Alm Crcl, Manual  
Arrvl Alm Crcl  
Course Vector  
You may extend a line from the own ship  
position to show ship’s course. It may be a  
vector (length depends on ship’s speed) or a  
simple line (course bar)  
Line, Vector, Off  
Line  
Set GOTO  
Method  
Sets the method by which to navigate to a  
quick point. See paragraph “3.10.1 Navigating 35 Pts/Port Service  
to a quick point.”  
1 Point, 35 Points,  
1 Point  
QP  
To display destination waypoint from an  
external navigation connected, select “EXT  
WPT (RMB).”  
EXT WPT (RMB),  
INTERNAL  
INTERNAL  
D. BOX  
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 5.5.  
(soft key)  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.3.2  
Function key setup  
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default  
plotter function key settings are as shown in the table below.  
Function Key  
Default Function  
Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track.  
Edit mark/line.  
Function Key Label  
1
2
3
4
5
TRK  
EML  
Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points). RUL  
Add new waypoint.  
ADD  
ALP  
Alphanumeric waypoint list.  
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.  
FUNC  
KEY  
Function key  
setting  
SOFT KEY 1  
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF  
EDIT  
T
R
K
Function  
key label  
SOFT KEY 2  
EML: EDIT MK/LINE  
E
M
L
SOFT KEY 3  
RUL: RULER  
R
U
L
SOFT KEY 4  
ADD: ADD NEW WPT  
A
D
D
SOFT KEY 5  
ALP: ALPHA LIST  
RETURN  
A
L
P
Plotter function key menu  
3. Select the soft key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key. A menu  
shows the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.  
SOF TKEY 1  
OFF  
ADD: ADD NEW WPT  
MWP: MOVE WPT  
RUL: RULER  
GWP: GOTO WPT  
GRT: GOTO ROUTE  
EML: EDIT MK/LINE  
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF  
TTM: TTM ON/OFF  
ETT: DEL TGT TRK  
▲
ALP: ALPHA LIST  
Scroll  
LCL: LOCAL LIST  
RTE: ROUTE LIST  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL  
Plotter function key options  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the  
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Plotter function keys  
Menu Item  
Function  
Function Key Label  
OFF  
Assigns no function.  
—
ADD: ADD NEW WPT  
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place  
cursor for waypoint location then press function  
key.  
ADD  
MWP: MOVE WPT  
RUL: RULER  
Moves selected waypoint to different position.  
Select waypoint then press function key.  
MWP  
RUL  
Measures range and bearing between two  
points. Press START POINT soft key to change  
starting point if necessary. Range and bearing  
between two points appears at the top of the  
screen.  
GWP: GOTO WPT  
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter  
number in window and press the ENTER soft  
key.  
GWP  
GRT: GOTO ROUTE  
EML: EDIT MK/LINE  
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF  
TTM: TTM ON/OFF  
Specify route to follow. Enter number in window  
and press the ENTER soft key.  
GRT  
EML  
TRK  
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate  
soft key to access menu item.  
Each pressing stops or starts recording of own  
ship track.  
Turns TTM (target track) display on/off.  
TTM  
DTT  
ALP  
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK Erases all TTM track.  
ALP: ALPHA LIST  
LCL: LOCAL LIST  
RTE: ROUTE LIST  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.  
Displays waypoint local list.  
Displays route list.  
LCL  
RTE  
DBX  
CHG  
Shows/hides data boxes.  
CHG: CHANGE  
CNTRL*  
Changes control in combination screen.  
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all  
display for CHG.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.4  
Chart Setup  
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart  
position to turning chart attributes on or off.  
5.4.1  
Chart offset  
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the  
position of the ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You  
can compensate for this error by offsetting chart position as shown in the  
procedure below. You can execute the procedure from any display mode.  
1. Show the plotter display and press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART  
SETUP and CHART OFFSET soft keys.  
34 24. 3456 N 359.9°M  
CHART  
+
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt OFFSET  
SET  
OFFSET  
RESET  
OFFSET  
RETURN  
Plotter display, chart offset selected  
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at correct latitude and longitude of  
own ship position.  
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.  
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( )  
appears.  
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above  
procedure.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.4.2  
FURUNO, Nav-Charts™ chart attributes  
Charts attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,  
which you may display as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.  
CHART  
DETAILS  
CHART  
DETAILS  
LAT/LON GRID  
GREEN  
LAT/LON GRID  
ON  
TEXT INFORMATION  
ON  
TEXT INFORMATION  
EDIT  
EDIT  
ON  
WAYPOINTS  
LARGE  
WAYPOINT NAMES  
ON  
WAYPOINTS  
LARGE  
WAYPOINT NAMES  
CNTOUR  
LINE  
CNTOUR  
LINE  
ON  
CHART BORDER LINES  
ON  
LANDMASS  
BRT YELLOW  
BACKGROUND  
BLACK  
CHART BORDER LINES  
ON  
LANDMASS  
ON  
NAVAIDS  
ON  
NAVAIDS  
LIGHT SECTOR INFO  
ON  
RETURN  
RETURN  
ON  
LIGHT SECTOR INFO  
ON  
OTHER SYMBOLS  
OFF  
OTHER SYMBOLS  
WHITE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
MARKS SIZE  
LARGE  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Chart details menu (FURUNO, Nav-Charts™)  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts)  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Item  
Description  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Lat/Lon Grid  
Latitude and  
Red, yellow,  
Green  
On, Off  
On  
longitude grids  
green, light-blue,  
purple, blue,  
white.  
Off  
Text Information Geographic  
place, name  
On, Off  
On  
On, Off  
On  
Waypoints  
Waypoint size  
Large, Small, Off Large  
Large, Small,  
Off  
Large  
On  
Waypoint  
Names  
Waypoint name  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
On, Off  
Chart Border  
Lines  
Border lines  
(indices)  
On  
On, Off  
On  
Landmass  
Landmass  
brilliance  
(monochrome  
model), color  
(color model)  
Brt, Dim: Red,  
yellow, green,  
light-blue, purple,  
blue, white.  
Off  
Brt Yellow  
Brt, Dim, Off  
Brt  
Background  
Navaids  
Chart  
background color  
White, Black  
Black  
On  
—
Navaid data on  
Nav-Charts™;  
lighthouse data  
on FURUNO  
charts  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
Light Sector  
Info  
Lighthouse  
viewing sector  
On, Off  
On  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
On  
Other Symbols Other map  
symbols  
Red, yellow,  
green, light-blue,  
purple, blue,  
white.  
White  
Off  
Marks Size  
Mark size  
Large, Small  
Large  
Large, Small  
On, Off  
Large  
On  
CNTOUR LINE < 10 m  
soft key  
Same as Other  
Symbol  
On, Red  
(Depth contours  
for depths at  
right)*  
10 m  
Same as Other  
Symbol  
On, Yellow  
On, Light-blue  
On, Red  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
On  
On  
> 10 m  
Same as Other  
Symbol  
Depth Info  
Same as Other  
Symbol  
* = Depth contour color for MODEL1722C/1723C series available in, red, yellow,  
green, light-blue, purple, blue, and white.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
CNTOUR LINE soft key  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.  
3. Press the CNTOUR LINE soft key.  
CNTOUR  
CNTOUR  
LINE  
DEPTH < 10m  
RED  
DEPTH = 10m  
YELLOW  
DEPTH > 10m  
LIGHT BLUE  
DEPTH < 10m  
LINE  
ON  
DEPTH = 10m  
EDIT  
EDIT  
ON  
DEPTH > 10m  
ON  
DEPTH INFORMATION  
ON  
DEPTH INFORMATION  
RED  
10m: APPROX. 30ft OR 5fa  
OR 6pb  
10m: APPROX. 30ft OR 5fa  
OR 6pb  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Contour line menu (FURUNO, Nav-Charts™)  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.4.3  
C-MAP chart attributes  
Charts attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,  
which you may display as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.  
CHART  
DETAILS  
CHART  
DETAILS  
WAYPOINT  
ON  
PLACE NAME  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
COMPASS  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
TIDE & CURRENT  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
NATURAL FEATURE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
RIVER & LAKE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
WAYPOINT NAME  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
LAT/LON GRID  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
EDIT  
EDIT  
DEPTH  
INFO  
DEPTH  
INFO  
CHART BORDER LINE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
BACKGROUND  
BLACK  
PORT & SERVICE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
ATTENTION AREA  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
NAV LANE  
CULTURAL FEATURE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
LANDMARK  
Color  
NEXT  
PAGE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
CHART GENERATION  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
NEW OBJECT  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
LIGHT  
PREV.  
PAGE  
RETURN  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
BUOY & BEACON  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
SIGNAL  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON  
MULTIPLE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
INFORMATION LEVEL  
BASIC  
Page 1  
Page 2  
CHART  
DETAILS  
CHART  
DETAILS  
PLACENAME  
WAYPOINT  
ON  
ON  
WAYPOINT NAME  
COMPASS  
EDIT  
EDIT  
ON  
ON  
LAT/LON GRID  
TIDE & CURRENT  
ON  
ON  
DEPTH  
INFO  
DEPTH  
INFO  
CHART BORDER LINE  
ON  
NATURAL FEATURE  
ON  
PORT & SERVICE  
RIVER & LAKE  
ON  
ON  
ATTENTION AREA  
Mono  
CULTURAL FEATURE  
ON  
NEXT  
PAGE  
ON  
NAV LANE  
ON  
LANDMARK  
LIGHT  
ON  
ON  
PREV.  
PAGE  
CHART GENERATION  
ON  
RETURN  
BUOY & BEACON  
ON  
NEW OBJECT  
ON  
SIGNALS  
ON  
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON  
MULTIPLE  
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT  
ON  
INFORMATION LEVEL  
BASIC  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Chart details menu (C-map)  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of chart details menu (C-map)  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Item  
Description  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Waypoints  
Waypoint display Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Black  
On, Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Waypoint Names Waypoint name  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Lat/Lon Grid  
Latitude and  
longitude grids  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Chart Border  
Lines  
Border lines  
(indices)  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Background  
Chart  
White, Black  
—
background color  
Port & Service  
Attention Area  
Port services  
icon display  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
On, Off  
On  
Attention area  
icon display  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Plotter/  
Contour, Off  
On, Contour, Off On  
Nav Lane  
Light  
Navigation lanes Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
On, Off  
On  
On  
Lighthouse icon, Plotter/Overlay,  
On, No Sector,  
Off  
sector  
Plotter, Plot/No  
Sector, Off  
Buoy & Beacon  
Signal  
Buoys, beacons Plotter/Overlay,  
display Plotter, Off  
Signals category Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
On  
On  
icon  
Plotter, Off  
Cartographic  
Object  
Cartographic  
Plotter/Overlay,  
objects category Plotter, Off  
icon  
Place Name  
Compass  
Geographic  
names  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Compass  
category icons  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Tide & Current  
Natural Feature  
River & Lake  
Tide display  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Land outline  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Rivers and lakes Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Cultural Feature Cultural features Plotter/Overlay,  
icons  
Plotter, Off  
Landmark  
Landmarks  
category icons  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
(Continued on next page)  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of C-MAP chart details menu (continued from previous page)  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Item  
Description  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Chart Generation Chart generation Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Multiple  
On, Off  
On  
category icons  
Plotter, Off  
New Object  
New object  
category icons  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
On, Off  
On  
Complex Object Single or multiple Multiple, Single  
Multiple, Single  
Multiple  
Icon  
icon for object  
composed of  
several icons  
Information Level Basic or detailed Basic, Detailed  
data for objects  
Basic  
Basic, Detailed  
On, Off  
Basic  
On  
DEPTH INFO  
(soft key)  
Bathymetric Line Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
Plotter/Overlay  
See illustration  
on next page  
Spot Sounding  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
On, Off  
On  
Bottom Type  
Plotter/Overlay,  
Plotter, Off  
On, Off  
On  
Contour Shading 0-99999ft  
(m, fa, PB)  
20,164ft (6, 50m, 0-99999ft  
3, 27 fa, 4, 30PB) (m, fa, PB)  
20ft (6m, 3fa,  
4PB)  
Spot Sounding  
Range  
0-99999ft  
(m, fa, PB)  
0-33ft (0-10m,  
0-6fa, 0-6PB)  
0-99999ft  
(m, fa, PB)  
0-33ft (0-10m,  
0-6fa, 0-6PB)  
Settings description  
Basic: Shows basic characteristics of objects.  
Detailed: Shows detailed characteristics of objects.  
Multiple: Shows multiple icons for complex objects  
Off: Turns item off.  
On: Turns item on.  
Plotter: Shows item on plotter display:  
Plot/No Sector: Sector not shown on track display.  
Plotter/Contour: Shows contour on track display.  
Plotter/Overlay: Shows item on plotter and overlay displays.  
Single: Shows single icon for complex objects.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
DEPTH INFO soft key  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.  
3. Press the DEPTH INFO soft key.  
DEPTH  
DEPTH  
INFO  
BATHYMETRIC LINE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
SPOT SOUNDING  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
BOTTOM TYPE  
BATHYMETRIC LINE  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
SPOT SOUNDING  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
BOTTOM TYPE  
INFO  
EDIT  
EDIT  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
CONTOUR SHADING  
33 ft  
PLOTTER/OVERLAY  
CONTOUR SHADING  
00020, 00164ft  
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE  
00000 - 00033ft  
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE  
00000 - 00033ft  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Depth info menu (C-map)  
Note: The spot sounding range setting allows you to control the color (or shade)  
associated to user assigned depths. Any contour line area that contains a  
depth that is LOWER than the first number will be shown in dark blue  
(dark tone). Any contour line area that contains a depth BETWEEN the  
first and second number will be shown as light blue (medium tone). Any  
contour line area that contain a depth that is HIGHER than the second  
number will be white (light tone). For example, if the spot sounding range  
setting is set to 0010-00010 ft, all contour areas that contain any depth  
less than 10 ft deep would be shaded dark blue (dark tone), all depth  
contour areas that contain a depth between 10 and 50 feet will be shaded  
light blue (medium tone), and all contour areas over 50 feet deep will be  
white (light tone).  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.5  
Data Boxes Setup  
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and  
sounder displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and  
two for large size data box.  
1. Display the plotter, radar or sounder display, whichever you want to set.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected  
at step 1.  
Radar mode: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX  
Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX  
Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX  
DATA  
DATABOX SIZE  
BOX  
SMALL  
POSITION  
WAYPOINT  
COG  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
EDIT  
SOG  
STWOFF  
BEARING  
RANGE  
TIME TO GO  
ETA  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
TEMPERATURE OFF  
DEPTH  
TRIP LOG  
DATE  
TIME  
WIND  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
RETURN  
Data box menu  
4. Use the cursor pad to select an item and then press the EDIT soft key.  
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection. Six  
items may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.  
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.6  
Hot Page Setup  
Five user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired  
display.  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION,  
SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP  
soft keys in that order.  
HOT PAGE 1  
HOT PAGE 2  
HOT PAGE 3  
HOT PAGE 4  
HOT PAGE 5  
Hot page setup menu  
2. Use the cursor pad to select the hot page number to set and then press the  
EDIT soft key. The full-screen selection window appears.  
HOT PAGE 1  
RADAR  
NAV  
PLOT  
SNDR  
OVRLY  
Full-screen selection window (“OVRLY” for color model only)  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full-screen picture desired and push  
the [ENTER] knob. A set of combination screens, corresponding to the  
full-screen selected, appears.  
HOT PAGE 1  
-
-
-
-
10  
-
-
-
-
20  
Combination screen selection window  
4. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full screen or combination screen  
desired and push it to set.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.7  
Navigator Setup  
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of  
navigator connected to your plotter.  
5.7.1  
Navigation data  
source  
NAV  
POSITION SOURCE  
SETUP  
ALL  
The NAV SETUP menu  
mainly selects the source  
SPEED AVERAGING*  
EDIT  
0060  
* For GPS receiver other  
than GP-310B/320B.  
of nav data. For GPS  
receiver other than the  
GP-310B/320B, speed  
averaging and local time  
offset (to use local time)  
are also available. Press  
the [MENU] key followed by  
the SYSTEM  
LOCAL TIME OFFSET*  
+00:00  
TEMP CALIBRATION  
00°F  
DEPTH CALIBRATION  
00ft  
RETURN  
CONFIGURATION, NAV  
OPTION and NAV  
SOURCE SETTINGS soft  
keys to display this menu.  
Nav setup menu  
Contents of nav setup menu  
Default  
Setting  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Position  
Source  
Chooses source of position data.  
FURUNO BB GPS: GPS  
Receiver GP-310B/320B  
GP: GPS navigator (via  
ALL  
NETWORK or NMEA connector)  
LC: Loran C navigator (via  
NETWORK or NMEA connector)  
All: Multiple navaid connection  
( via NETWORK or NMEA  
connector)  
Speed  
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s  
0-9999 sec  
60 sec  
00:00  
Averaging speed over a given period. If the period is too long  
or too short, calculation error will result. Change  
this setting if calculation error occurs. The default  
setting is suitable for most conditions.  
Local Time GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather use local  
-13:30 to +13:30  
Offset  
time, enter the time difference between it and  
UTC. Use the +<-->- soft key to switch from plus to  
minus and vice versa.  
Temp  
Calibration data.  
Offsets NMEA/NETWORK water temperature  
-40°F - + 40°F  
-15 - +90 ft  
0°F  
0 ft  
Depth  
Offsets NMEA/NETWORK depth data.  
Calibration  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.7.2  
GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)  
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GPS-310B/320B. Press the  
[MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and  
GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.  
GPS  
LOCAL TIME OFFSET  
SETUP  
+00:00  
GEODETIC DATUM  
WGS-84  
POSITION SMOOTHING  
000 second(s)  
EDIT  
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING  
GPS  
STATUS  
005 second(s)  
GPS SPEED AVERAGING  
060 second(s)  
LATITUDE OFFSET  
0.000’N  
LONGITUDE OFFSET  
0.000’E  
WAAS  
SETUP*  
DISABLE SATELLITE  
_ _ _ _ _ _  
LATITUDE  
38 00.000’ N  
LONGITUDE  
123 00.000’ E  
ANTENNA HEIGHT  
005 m  
RETURN  
GPS FIX MODE  
2D/3D  
COLD START  
NO  
*: Only when the GP-320B is connected.  
GPS sensor setup menu  
Contents of GPS setup menu  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Local Time Offset  
Lets you use local time (instead of UTC time). Enter time -13:30 to +13:30  
difference between local time and UTC time. Set this item hours  
when using the GPS-310B/320B.  
00:00  
Geodetic Datum  
WGS-84  
Note: Geodetic Datum is a reference for geodetic survey See Appendix for full  
list.  
measurements consisting of fixed latitude, longitude and  
azimuth values associated with a defined station of  
reference. You must have the correct Geodetic Datum  
selected in your plotter so that it will reference the correct  
point on the chart for a given lat / lon. Although WGS-84  
is now the world standard, other categories of charts still  
exist. refer to Appendix for a full list of geodetic datum.  
Position Smoothing  
0-999 sec  
0 sec (no position  
smoothing)  
When the DOP or receiving condition is unfavorable, the  
GPS fix may change greatly, even if the vessel is not  
moving in water. This change can be reduced by  
smoothing the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000 to  
999 is available. The higher the setting, the more  
smoothed the raw data. If the setting is too high, the  
response time required to show a change of Lat and LON  
will be too long. this is especially noticeable if the vessel  
is moving fast. This is especially noticeable at high ship’  
speeds. Increase the setting to increase the amount of  
averaging applied to the GPS fix.  
(Continued on next page)  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Contents of GPS sensor setup menu (con’t from previous page)  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Spd/Cse  
Smoothing  
During position fixing, ship’s velocity (speed and course) 0-999 sec  
is directly measured by receiving GPS satellite signals.  
The raw velocity data may vary too much depending on  
receiving conditions and other factors. You can reduce  
this variance by increasing the smoothing. Like with  
latitude and longitude smoothing, the higher the speed  
and course smoothing the higher the smoothing setting,  
the more the raw data will be averaged. If this setting is  
high, the response to speed and course changes will  
slow. For no smoothing, enter all zeros.  
5 sec  
GPS Speed  
Averaging  
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s speed  
over a given period. If the period is too long or too short,  
calculation error will result. Change this setting if  
calculation error occurs. The default setting is suitable for  
most conditions.  
0-999 sec  
60 sec  
Latitude,  
Longitude  
Offset  
Offsets latitude position to further refine position  
accuracy. Use the N<− −>S soft key to switch  
coordinate.  
0.001’S – 9.999’N  
0.001’E – 9.999’W  
0.0’ (no offset)  
None  
Disable  
Satellite  
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal satellite  
number(s) in its Almanac, which contains general orbital  
data about all GPS satellites, including those which are  
malfunctioning. Using this information, the GPS receiver  
automatically eliminates any malfunctioning satellite from  
the GPS satellite schedule. However, the Almanac  
sometimes may not contain this information. If you hear  
about a malfunctioning satellite from another source, you  
can disable it manually. Enter satellite number (two digits,  
max. 3 satellites) with the trackball and [ENTER] knob  
and press the ENTER soft key.  
—
—
Latitude  
Sets initial latitude position after cold start. Use the  
N< − −>S soft key to switch coordinate.  
Sets initial longitude position after cold start. Use the  
W< − −>E soft key to switch coordinate.  
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit above sea  
surface. For further details refer to the installation  
manual.  
45°35.000’N  
125°00.000’W  
5 m  
Longitude  
Antenna  
Height  
0-99 m  
GPS Fix  
Mode  
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three satellites in  
view), 2D/3D (three or four satellites in view whichever is  
greater).  
2D, 2D/3D  
No, Yes  
2D/3D  
No  
Cold Start  
Clears the Almanac to receive the latest Almanac.  
GPS STATUS Displays GPS satellite status display. Requires GPS Receiver GP-310/320B or GPS navigator outputting  
(soft key)  
the data sentence GSA or GSV. For further details see the chapter on Maintenance.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
WAAS SETUP  
Press the WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.  
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna. Also, confirm that your display  
unit has the program version no. shown below.  
NavChart type: Ver. 12 and after  
C-map type: Ver.8 and after  
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
On, Off  
Default setting  
Off  
WAAS MODE  
Select ON to use the WAAS mode.  
WAAS SEARCH WAAS satellite can be searched  
automatically or manually. For manual  
search, select MANUAL here, and enter  
the satellite number (s).  
Auto, Manual Auto  
WAAS ALARM  
When the positioning mode is changed  
from WAAS to GPS, the audible alarm  
sounds with the visual message “NO  
WAAS SIGNAL.” This audible alarm type  
can be changed here.  
On, Off  
Off  
On: Alarm continues to sound until the  
WAAS positioning mode is available again  
or the alarm is recognized by key  
operation.  
Off: Alarm sounds three times.  
CORRECTION  
DATA SET  
Selects the type of message for WAAS  
correction. Use setting “02” until the  
system becomes operational, which should  
be in 2003.  
00 to 27, 99  
02  
Note: If the message “NO POSITION DATA!” appears, it means an error occurs  
on GPS-310B/320B. Disconnect GPS cable from the display unit.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.7.3  
TD display setup  
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD  
position. (Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to  
display TD position.)  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft  
keys to display the TD SETUP menu.  
TD  
LORAN-C  
SETUP  
GRI  
9940:11-27  
EDIT  
U.S. WEST COAST  
CORRECTION 1  
+000.0 µs  
CORRECTION 2  
+000.0 µs  
DECCA  
CHAIN  
01 R-G  
S BALTIC  
CORRECTION 1  
RETURN  
+00.00 lane  
CORRECTION 2  
+00.00 lane  
TD setup menu  
Displaying Loran C TDs  
1. Select GRI and press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair  
window.  
GRI & STATION PAIR  
▲
9940  
11-27  
▲
U.S. WEST COAST  
Loran GRI & station pair window  
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select GRI code.  
3. Press ► to enable selection of station pair.  
4. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select station pair.  
GRI & STATION PAIR  
▲
11-27  
9940  
▲
U.S. WEST COAST  
Loran GRI & station pair window  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.  
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position  
accuracy. Select (GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2 and press the  
EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob  
and then press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +<− −>-  
soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.  
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.  
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.  
9. Press the NEXT PAGE soft key.  
10.Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY”, “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY” and  
press the ENTER soft key.  
11. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Displaying DECCA TDs  
1. Select CHAIN and press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair  
window.  
CHAIN STATION PAIR  
▲
01  
R-G  
▲
S BALTIC  
Decca chain and station pair window  
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select Decca chain number.  
3. Press ► to enable selection of lane.  
CHAIN STATION PAIR  
▲
R-G  
01  
▲
S BALTIC  
4. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select lane pair (R: red, G: green and P:  
purple).  
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.  
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select  
(CHAIN) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2 and press the EDIT soft key.  
Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob and then press  
the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +<− −>- soft key to switch  
from plus to minus and vice versa.  
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.  
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.  
10.Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY”, “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY” and  
press the ENTER soft key.  
11. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.8  
Nav Data Display Setup  
The nav data display provides various navigation data, fed from a navigator,  
network equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display  
it, on the NAV DATA menu.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV  
DISP SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.  
NAV  
DATA  
1
POSITION  
EDIT  
2
3
SOG  
WPT POS  
4
5
STW  
COG  
Positions  
for full  
screen  
6
7
BEARING  
RANGE  
8
9
DEPTH  
TEMP  
10  
11  
TTG  
RETURN  
LOG TRIP  
12  
ETA  
Positions  
for half  
screen  
13  
DATE  
14  
TIME  
Nav data setup screen  
3. Use the cursor pad to select a location  
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.  
DISPLAY DATA  
POSITION  
WPT POSITION  
SOG  
STW  
COG  
BEARING  
RANGE  
DEPTH  
TEMPERATURE  
TRIP LOG  
TIME TO GO  
ETA  
DATE  
TIME  
WIND  
Nav data setup window  
5. Select the data to display and press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to  
register your selection.  
6. Press the RETURN soft key.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.9  
Sounder Setup  
This section shows you how to customize your sounder to your liking. You can  
set fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensor data, etc.  
5.9.1  
System setup  
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.  
SYSTEM  
SETUP1  
SYSTEM  
SETUP2  
FISH ALARM LEVEL  
MEDIUM  
TRANSMISSION  
STC-HF  
00  
STC-LF  
00  
EDIT  
EDIT  
ON  
TVG-HF  
FREQ. ADJ.-HF  
+00.0 %  
5
SENSOR  
SETUP  
TVG-LF  
SENSOR  
SETUP  
FREQ.ADJ.-LF  
+00.0 %  
5
ECHO OFFSET-HF  
+00  
TARGET ECHO  
NORMAL  
ECHO OFFSET-LF  
+00  
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF  
+000  
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF  
+000  
NEXT  
PAGE  
KP PULSE  
INTERNAL  
SMOOTHING  
OFF  
PREV.  
PAGE  
RETURN  
TLL OUTPUT  
ON  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Sounder system setup menu  
Sounder system setup menu description  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Fish Alarm Level Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is the High: Orange and stronger echoes  
minimum echo strength which will trigger (strongest echoes on monochrome  
the fish and fish (B/L) alarms.  
model) trigger the alarm.*  
Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes  
(medium strength echoes on  
monochrome model) trigger the alarm.*  
Low: Green and stronger echoes (weak  
echoes on monochrome mode) trigger  
the alarm.*  
* = 8-color display  
On, Off  
Transmission  
Turns TX power on/off.  
(Continued on next page)  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t)  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
TVG  
(LF, HF)  
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates for propagation 0-9  
attenuation of the ultrasonic waves. It does this by  
equalizing echo presentation so that fish schools of  
the same size appear in the same density in both  
shallow and deep waters. In addition, it reduces  
surface noise. Note that if the TVG level is set too  
high short range echoes may not be displayed.  
Echo Offset  
(LF, HF)  
If the on-screen echo level appears to be too weak or -50 - +50  
too strong and the level cannot be adjusted  
satisfactorily with the gain control, adjust echo offset  
to compensate for too weak or too strong echoes. The  
default setting for both HF and LF is zero.  
Bottom Level  
(LF, HF)  
If the depth indication is unstable in automatic  
operation or the bottom echo cannot be displayed in  
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain control in manual  
operation, you may adjust the bottom echo level  
detection circuit, for both LF and HF, to stabilize the  
indication. Note that if the level is set too low weak  
echoes may be missed and if set too high the depth  
indication will not be displayed.  
-100 - +100  
KP Pulse  
Selects source of keying pulse.  
Internal, External (See  
installation manual.)  
Smoothing  
TLL Output  
Smooths echoes to present stable display. The higher SM1-SM4, OFF  
the setting the greater the smoothing.  
Outputs cursor position to external equipment.  
ON, OFF  
0-10  
STC (HF, LF)  
(For ETR-30N only)  
Adjusts STC level for the high and low frequencies,  
and is useful for suppressing surface noise. The  
setting range is 0-10; the higher the setting the  
greater the extent or suppression. Setting 10  
suppresses noise up to several meters. Turn off the  
STC when there is no noise on the screen, otherwise  
weak echoes may be missed.  
FREQ. ADJ. (HF, LF) Interference from other acoustic equipment operating  
-10 - +10  
(For ETR-30N only)  
nearby or other electronic equipment on your boat may  
show itself on the display. You may suppress these type  
of interference by adjusting frequency.  
TARGET ECHO  
(For ETR-30N only)  
Sets fishing objective. Normal for general fishing,  
Surface for detecting surface. Pulse repetition rate is  
higher than Normal on the specified transducer.  
Normal, Surface  
SENSOR SETUP  
(soft key)  
Offsets speed, depth and water temperature  
indications and speed of sound.  
See next section for  
details.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.9.2  
Sensor setup  
The sensor setup menu lets you further refine speed, temperature and depth  
data fed from the network sounder.  
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to  
show the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water  
temperature, depth and speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the  
menu.  
SENSOR  
SPEED CALIBRATION  
SETUP  
+ 00%  
TEMP CALIBRATION  
EDIT  
+ 0°F  
DEPTH CALIBRATION  
+0.0ft  
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION  
+ 000m/s  
RETURN  
SPEED  
12.3kt  
DEPTH  
TEMP  
78.8°F  
ACSTC SPD  
1500m/s  
125.0ft  
Sensor setup menu  
3. Select item to adjust and press the EDIT soft key.  
4. Use the cursor pad to display appropriate value as below.  
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For  
example, if the water temperature readout is 77°F but the actual water  
temperature is 75°F, enter –2(°F).  
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance  
between ship’s draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set  
ship’s draft here. Enter a plus or minus value.  
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network  
sounder. Note that this is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.  
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.  
Sensor setup menu settings  
Item  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Speed Calibration  
Temperature Calibration  
Depth Calibration  
-50 -+50%  
-40°F - +40°F  
-15 - +90 (any unit of  
measurement)  
0 (no offset)  
0 (no offset)  
0 (no offset)  
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s  
0(m/s)  
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.9.3  
Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range  
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom  
range (marker and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges  
are restored whenever the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore,  
change the depth unit before changing the basic ranges.  
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER  
RANGE SETUP menu.  
RANGE  
SETUP  
RANGE 1  
15 ft  
RANGE 2  
EDIT  
30 ft  
RANGE 3  
60 ft  
RANGE 4  
120 ft  
RANGE 5  
200 ft  
RANGE 6  
400 ft  
RANGE 7  
1000 ft  
RANGE 8  
4000 ft  
ZOOM RANGE  
RETURN  
10 ft  
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE  
10 ft  
Sounder range setup menu  
3. Select the range to change and press the EDIT soft key. Available settings  
are as below. For sounding range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range  
cannot be higher than its succeeding neighbor.  
4. Use the cursor pad to set range desired, then press the RETURN soft key.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to finish.  
Default ranges  
Range 8  
Range 1  
Range 2  
Range 3  
Range 4  
Range 5  
Range 6  
Range 7  
ETR-6/10N  
1200 m  
4000 ft  
ETR-30N  
1500 m  
4500 ft  
900 fa  
5 m  
15 ft  
3 fa  
10 m  
30 ft  
5 fa  
20 m  
60 ft  
10 fa  
10 PB  
40 m  
120 ft  
20 fa  
80 m  
200 ft  
40 fa  
150 m  
400 ft  
80 fa  
300 m  
1000 ft  
150 fa  
650 fa  
3 PB  
5 PB  
30 PB  
50 PB  
100 PB  
200 PB  
700 PB  
900 P/B  
Setting range: 2 m –1200m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 2 fa – 650 fa, 1 PB – 1000 PB  
Zoom range and bottom lock ranges  
Item  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Zoom Range  
2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,  
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 PB – 70 PB  
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 PB  
Bottom-lock Range 3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft  
2 or 3 fa, 2 or 3 PB  
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 PB  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5.9.4  
Function key setup  
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default  
sounder function key settings are as shown in the table below.  
Function Key  
Default Function  
Function Key Label  
1
2
3
4
5
Output cursor position  
TLL  
CLT  
SLV  
NL  
Suppress clutter.  
Erase weak signal.  
Suppress noise.  
Set picture advancement speed.  
PA  
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:  
1. Show the sounder display.  
2. Press the [MENU] key.  
3. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.  
FUNC  
Function key  
setting  
KEY  
SOFT KEY 1  
TLL: TLL OUTPUT  
EDIT  
T
L
L
Function  
key label  
SOFT KEY 2  
CLT: CLUTTER  
C
L
T
SOFT KEY 3  
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL  
S
L
V
SOFT KEY 4  
NL: NOISE LEVEL  
N
L
SOFT KEY 5  
PA: PICTURE ADV  
RETURN  
P
A
Sounder function key menu  
4. Select the function key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key.  
SOFT KEY 1  
SOFT KEY 1  
TVF: TVG - LF  
OFF  
EOH: OFFSET - HF  
EOL: OFFSET - LF  
SMT: SMOOTHING  
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE  
BLR: B/L RANGE  
MOD: AUTO MODE  
GHF: GAIN - HF  
GLF: GAIN - LF  
Scroll  
down  
SFT: SHIFT  
NL: NOISE LEVEL  
CLT: CLUTTER  
TLL: TLL OUTPUT  
SSR: SNDR SOURCE  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
WMK: WHITE MARKER  
HUE: HUE  
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL  
PA: PICTURE ADV  
TG: TEMP. GRAPH  
TVH: TVG - HF  
Sounder function key options  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT  
5. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the  
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.  
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
Sounder function keys  
Menu Item  
Function  
Function Key Label  
OFF  
Assigns no function.  
MOD: AUTO MODE  
GHF: GAIN - HF  
Display automatic mode selection window.  
MOD  
GHF  
Displays high frequency gain adjustment  
window.  
Displays low frequency gain adjustment  
window.  
GLF: GAIN - LF  
GLF  
SFT: SHIFT  
Shifts range in manual operation.  
Suppresses noise.  
SFT  
NL  
NL: NOISE LIMITER  
CLT: CLUTTER  
Suppresses clutter.  
CLT  
WMK  
HUE  
SLV  
PA  
WMK: WHITE MARKER  
HUE: HUE  
Sets white marker. (color only)  
Sets hue (color model only).  
Erases weak signals.  
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL  
PA: PICTURE ADV  
TG: TEMP. GRAPH  
TVH: TVG - HF  
Sets picture advance speed.  
Turns temperature graph on/off.  
Sets TVG for high frequency.  
Sets TVG for low frequency.  
Offsets echo strength for high frequency.  
Offsets echo strength for low frequency.  
Sets echo smoothing rate.  
Sets zoom range.  
TG  
TVH  
TVL  
EOH  
EOL  
SMT  
ZMR  
TVL: TVG - LF  
EOH: OFFSET – HF  
EOL: OFFSET - LF  
SMT: SMOOTHING  
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE  
Sets bottom-lock range for bottom-lock  
display.  
BLR: B/L RANGE  
BLR  
TLL  
SSR  
Outputs current position to plotter. Also  
inscribes line on sounder and registers  
position as a waypoint.  
TLL: TLL OUTPUT  
SSR: SNDR SOURCE  
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF  
Selects source for sounder data. Do not  
change this setting.  
Turns data boxes on/off.  
DBX  
CHG  
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL* Switches control in combination display.  
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all  
display for CHG.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from  
memory cards, and uploading and downloading data.  
6.1  
Memory Card Operations  
The memory cards function to store data, and the following data can be saved:  
• Marks/lines  
• Waypoints/routes  
• Track  
• Setting data (plotter only)  
6.1.1  
Formatting memory cards  
Before you can use a memory card it must be formatted. This prepares the card  
for use with the system. Note that formatting a memory card erases all saved  
data.  
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.  
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA  
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY  
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.  
SAVE  
DATA  
TRACKS  
OFF  
MARKS & LINES  
EDIT  
OFF  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES  
OFF  
SETTING DATA  
SAVE  
OFF  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
Save data menu  
3. Press the FORMAT soft key. You are asked if you are ready to format the  
memory card.  
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to format (or press the [CLEAR] key to escape).  
“NOW FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card  
while it is being formatting. When the formatting is completed, “FORMAT  
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.  
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.  
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED to  
FORMAT MEMORY CARD.” appears.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
6.1.2  
Saving data to a memory card  
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.  
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA  
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY  
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.  
SAVE  
DATA  
TRACKS  
OFF  
MARKS & LINES  
EDIT  
OFF  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES  
OFF  
SETTING DATA*  
SAVE  
OFF  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
* = Plotter data only  
Save data menu  
3. Use the cursor pad to select item to save.  
4. Press the EDIT soft key.  
5. Use the cursor pad to select ON.  
6. Press the ENTER soft key.  
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.  
8. Press the SAVE soft key. The message “NOW SAVING DATA TO MEMORY  
CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF THE DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL COMPLETED.”  
appears.  
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB  
TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
Memory card messages  
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related  
error. These are tabulated below.  
Memory card messages  
Message  
Reason  
Remedy  
Memory card is not  
inserted. Please insert inserted.  
card. Push ENTER  
Memory card not  
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the  
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.  
knob to continue.  
Memory card is not  
formatted. Push  
ENTER knob to  
continue.  
Unformatted memory Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the  
card.  
SAVE DATA display. Format the card  
referring to page 6-1.  
Wrong card is  
inserted. Please insert instead of memory  
correct memory card.  
Push ENTER knob to  
continue.  
Chart card inserted  
Remove chart, and insert memory card,  
and then push the [ENTER] knob to  
continue.  
card.  
Overwrite data?  
(Track)  
(Mark)  
(WPT)  
(Config)  
Data type to be  
Push the [ENTER] knob to overwrite  
same data type on the card, or press the  
[CLEAR] key to escape.  
recorded exists on  
memory card. (Two  
or more of same type  
of data cannot be  
recorded.)  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
6.1.3  
Playing back data from a memory card  
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from  
a memory card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing  
past data and setting up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setup data.”  
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and  
DATA TRANSFER soft keys.  
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.  
3. Press the LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD  
DATA menu.  
LOAD  
DATA  
TRACKS  
OFF  
MARKS & LINES  
EDIT  
OFF  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES  
OFF  
SETTING DATA*  
LOAD  
OFF  
RETURN  
* = Plotter data only  
Load data menu  
4. Use the cursor pad to select item to load.  
5. Press the EDIT soft key.  
6. Use the [ENTER] knob to select ON. (Select OFF to not load selected data.)  
Press the ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item  
selected, the buzzer sounds and ON cannot be selected.  
7. After you select all items desired, press the LOAD soft key to load data. The  
message “NOW LOADING DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.  
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA.  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to  
continue.  
Notes on loading data  
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be  
entered when the track memory capacity is exceeded.  
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line  
memory becomes full no marks may be entered.  
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data substitutes for previously stored.  
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the  
memory card is ejected while loading or data could not be loaded, push the  
[ENTER] knob to restart with default settings. Note that track memory capacity is  
not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data turn the power off and on again.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
6.2  
Uploading, Downloading Data  
You can upload waypoint and route data from a PC and download like data to a  
PC, through the DATA 3 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that sounder  
and radar data cannot be uploaded or downloaded.  
6.2.1  
Setting communication software on the PC  
Set communication software on the PC as follows:  
Baud Rate:  
4800 bps  
Character Length: 8 bits  
Stop bit:  
Parity:  
1 bit  
None  
X Control:  
XON/XOFF (fixed)  
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a personal computer  
and this equipment:  
• Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)  
• Route data (In order of route number)  
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route  
comment data.  
Note 2: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.  
6.2.2  
Uploading or downloading data  
1. Connect the PC to the equipment.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.  
3. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
4. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.  
5. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.  
6. Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/RTE DATA TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/RTE  
DATA FROM PC soft key.  
DOWN-  
LOAD  
WAYPOINT & ROUTES  
WAYPOINT & ROUTES  
UPLOAD  
OFF  
MARKS & LINES  
OFF  
OFF  
MARKS & LINES  
OFF  
RS232C SETTINGS  
· 4800BPS,  
RS232C SETTINGS  
· 4800BPS,  
EDIT  
EDIT  
· 8BIT,  
· 8BIT,  
·1STOP BIT,  
· PARITY NONE,  
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff  
·1STOP BIT,  
· PARITY NONE,  
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff  
UPLOAD  
DWLOAD  
SELECT  
BPS  
SELECT  
BPS  
WIRING INFORMATION  
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9  
WIRING INFORMATION  
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9  
TxD  
RxD  
RD-A  
RD-B  
+12V  
>1>-WHITE-<2<RD  
>2>-BLUE -<3<SD  
>3>-YELLOW  
>4>-GREEN  
TxD  
RxD  
RD-A  
RD-B  
+12V  
>1>-WHITE-<2<RD  
>2>-BLUE -<3<SD  
>3>-YELLOW  
>4>-GREEN  
>5>-RED  
>5>-RED  
RETURN  
RETURN  
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK  
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG  
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK  
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG  
Upload and download menus  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.  
BAUD RATE  
▲
▲
4800 bps  
9600 bps  
19200 bps  
Baud rate window  
8. Select baud rate and press the ENTER soft key.  
Note: Select the speed among 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.  
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to  
download or upload waypoints and routes.  
10. Push the [ENTER] knob to download or upload data.  
Waypoint data format  
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Waypoint data format  
1: Waypoint latitude  
2: N/S  
3: Waypoint longitude  
4: E/W  
5: Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed  
when the number of characters are less than 6.)  
6: Waypoint color  
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)  
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.  
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.  
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.  
“A”: Displayed  
“V”: Not displayed  
Note 1: Following characters can be used for comments:  
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#  
=;  
=9  
=>  
=B  
=:  
= =  
=<  
=?  
=C  
=A  
=@  
=D  
=E  
=H  
=G  
=F  
Characters available for comment  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
Route data menu  
$PFEC, GPrtc, xx, c----c <CR><LF>  
1
2
Route data format  
1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note  
2.  
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)  
3: Message mode (Always set to C)  
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)  
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is  
fixed to 7 byte)  
Note 2: A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for  
one route data may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is  
divided into several GPRTE sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value  
shows the number of sentences the route data has been divided.  
Route comment data format  
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>  
3
5
1 2  
4
6
12  
Route comment format  
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)  
2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)  
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.  
End of sentence  
$PFEC, GPxfr, CTL, E <CR><LF>  
End of sentence  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
6.3  
Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman  
Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the  
Yeoman to any DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure  
below.  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.  
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.  
4. Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.  
5. You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman  
equipment. Push the [ENTER] knob to receive the data.  
The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA. PUSH SOFTKEY ‘STOP’  
TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is reached the  
message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE RECEIVED.  
PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears.  
6. To stop receiving, press the STOP soft key.  
7. After waypoints have been received, press the [MENU] key to close the  
menu.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
6.4  
Receiving Data Via Network Equipment  
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.  
4. Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.  
RECEIVE  
HOST NAME  
DATA  
PLOT - - - -  
MARKS & LINES  
EDIT  
OFF  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES  
OFF  
RCV  
RETURN  
Receive data menu  
5. Select HOST NAME and press the EDIT soft key.  
HOST NAME  
PROT----  
Host name window  
6. Use the cursor pad and the alphanumeric keys to input host name then push  
the [ENTER] knob.  
7. Select the data you wish to receive and press the EDIT soft key. For example,  
select MARKS & LINES.  
MARKS & LINES  
▲
ON  
OFF  
▲
Marks & lines window  
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate and press the ENTER soft key.  
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA TRANSFER  
10. Press the RCV soft key to receive data.  
The message “START RECEIVING DATA VIA NETWORK.” is displayed. IF  
no data could be found the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.”  
appears.  
11. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER  
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the  
[ENTER] knob.  
12. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
6.5  
Outputting Data Through the Network  
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP and  
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.  
SELECT  
SELECT SENTENCE  
SNTNC  
AAM  
APB  
BOD  
BWR  
DPT  
GGA  
GLL  
GTD  
MTW  
RMA  
RMB  
RMC  
VHW  
VTG  
WPL  
XTE  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
ON/OFF  
RETURN  
ZDA  
HDT  
HDG  
MWV  
Select sentence menu  
3. Select sentence with the cursor pad.  
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.  
5. Press the RETURN soft key.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm, APB: Autopilot sentence B, BOD: Bearing origin to  
destination, BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line, DPT: Depth,  
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data, GLL: Geographic position -  
latutude/longitude, GTD: Own ship information-TD, MTW: Water temperature,  
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data, RMB: Recommended  
minimum navigation information, RMC: Recommended minimum specific  
GPS/TRANSIT data, VHW: Water speed and heading, VTG: Course over ground  
and ground speed, WPL: Waypoint location, XTE: Cross-track error, measured,  
ZDA: Time and date, HDT: Heading true, HDG: Heading, deviation and variation,  
MWV: Wind speed and angle  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE,  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good  
working order and remedying simple problems.  
WARNING  
Do not open the equipment.  
Hazardous voltage which can  
cause electrical shock exists  
inside the equipment. Only  
qualified personnel should  
work inside the equipment.  
7.1  
Preventive Maintenance  
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance  
schedule should be established and should at least include the items below.  
Maintenance program  
Item  
Check point  
Remedy  
Display unit  
connectors  
Check for tight connection.  
Tighten loosened connectors.  
LCD  
The LCD will, in time, accumulate a  
Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent  
coating of dust which tends to dim the scratching, using tissue paper and an  
picture  
LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt  
deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping  
slowly with tissue paper so as to  
dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper  
frequently so the salt or dirt will not  
scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents  
such as thinner, acetone or benzene  
for cleaning.  
Ground terminal  
Check for tight connection and  
corrosion.  
Clean or replace ground wire as  
necessary.  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.2  
Replacement of Fuse  
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the  
ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before  
replacing it. Use the correct fuse (10A for 12 V, 5A for 24 V). Using the wrong  
fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.  
CAUTION  
Use the proper fuse.  
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or  
damage the equipment.  
7.3  
Replacement of Battery  
A battery fitted on a circuit board inside the display unit preserves data when the  
equipment is turned off, and its life is about three years. When its voltage is low  
the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display. When the icon appears,  
contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.  
Parts Name  
Type  
Code No.  
Lithium battery CR2450-F2 ST2L  
000-144-941  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.4  
Simple Troubleshooting  
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can  
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not  
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified  
technician.  
7.4.1  
General  
General troubleshooting  
If…  
Then…  
you cannot turn on the  
power  
! check for blown fuse.  
! check that the power connector is firmly fastened.  
! check for corrosion on the power cable connector.  
! check for damaged power cable.  
! check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).  
there is no response when ! turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may be faulty.  
a key is pressed  
Request service.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.4.2  
Radar  
Requires a network radar.  
Radar troubleshooting  
If…  
But…  
Then…  
you pressed the  
nothing appears on the display  
! check that the signal cable between the  
display unit and the antenna is firmly  
fastened.  
[POWER/BRILL] key and  
the RADAR TX soft key to  
show the radar picture  
! Check that radar source is correct.  
marks, legends appear  
no echo appears  
! check in the power cable. If it is blown,  
replace it.  
picture not updated or  
picture freezes  
! check signal cable.  
! turn the display unit off and on again.  
—
tuning is adjusted  
sensitivity is poor  
! Magnetron may need to be replaced.  
Contact your dealer.  
range changed  
radar picture does not change  
! try to hit the [+] and [-] keys again.  
! turn the display unit off and on again.  
! adjust A/C SEA.  
! Check heading and speed data for input.  
! reselect true motion mode.  
poor discrimination in  
range  
—
—
—
true motion presentation  
not working properly  
range rings are not  
displayed  
! Hit the RADAR DISPLY and RINGS soft  
keys to display them.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.4.3  
Plotter  
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.  
Plotter troubleshooting  
If…  
Then…  
position is not fixed within  
three minutes  
! check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.  
! Check the satellites numbers received, on the GPS status display (GPS  
SENSOR SETTINGS menu, GPS STATUS key see page 7-11).  
position is wrong  
! check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS SENSOR  
SETTINGS menu.  
! enter position offset on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.  
track is not plotted  
bearing is wrong  
! plotting has been stopped. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.) Press the  
TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL menu to start  
plotting again.  
! check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL SETUP  
menu.  
Loran C (or Decca) TDs do ! check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the GENERAL  
not appear  
SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca) chains codes are  
entered, on the TD SETUP menu.  
Loran C TDs are wrong  
! enter TD offset on the TD SETUP menu.  
ship’s speed indication is  
not zero after the ship is  
stopped  
! try to decrease speed/course smoothing on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS  
menu.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.4.4  
Sounder  
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.  
Sounder troubleshooting  
If…  
But…  
Then…  
If you selected a  
sounder display with the  
DISP key  
no sounder display appears  
! check that the signal cable between the  
network sounder and this equipment is  
firmly fastened.  
! check that the network sounder is  
plugged in. The LED of the network  
sounder should flash every second.  
! Check that sounder source is correct.  
marks and characters  
appear  
picture does not appear  
zero line does not appear  
—
! check for loosened transducer connector.  
picture appears  
! the picture is shifted. confirm the shift  
setting  
picture sensitivity is too  
low  
! check gain setting, if using manual  
operation.  
! marine life or air bubbles may be clinging  
to transducer face.  
! bottom may be too soft to return a  
suitable echo.  
depth is not displayed  
—
! adjust gain to display the bottom echo (in  
reddish brown on the color model), if  
you are using the manual sounder  
mode.  
! correctly display bottom echo on the  
display, if you are using manual sounder  
mode.  
!confirm that ETR is selected at DEPTH  
SOURCE on GENERAL SETUP menu.  
noise or interference  
shows on the display  
—
—
! check to be sure the transducer cable is  
not near ship’s engine.  
! check the ground.  
! other video sounders of the same  
frequency as yours may be operating  
near you.  
water temperature graph  
appears but wrong or no  
readout  
! check that sensor cable is tightly  
fastened.  
!confirm that ETR is selected at DEPTH  
SOURCE on GENERAL SETUP menu.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.5  
Diagnostics  
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper  
operation. Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote  
controller test, and Test pattern.  
7.5.1  
Memory I/O test  
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, GPS  
receiver GP-310B/320B, network sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP,  
displaying program number and checking for proper operation.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.  
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.  
5. Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.  
MEMORY  
I/O TST  
DISPLAY UNIT TEST  
GPS SENSOR TEST*  
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**  
ARP TEST***  
RETURN  
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.  
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.  
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model  
1833/1833C series network radar.  
Test & memory clear menu  
6. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
Display unit test  
Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test  
the display unit. The equipment displays program version number, checks  
devices and shows the number of the chart card inserted in the chart slot (if  
inserted). Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any  
NG, request service. Test connector required to check ports. “- -“ appears when  
no test connector is no connected. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the  
MEMORY I/O TEST menu. Chart number shown for C-MAP cards only.  
PROGRAM No. 03591730XX  
Program No.  
ROM1, 2  
ROM3  
SDRAM  
SRAM  
INT. BATTERY  
PORT  
NMEA IN/OUT  
NMEA IN  
RS232  
: OK  
: OK  
: OK  
: OK  
: OK  
1722C series: (FURUNO/NAVIONICS) 03591730XX  
(C-MAP) 03591720  
1723C series: (FURUNO/NAVIONICS) 03591970XX  
(C-MAP) 03591960XX  
1722 series: (FURUNO/NAVIONICS) 03591710XX  
(C-MAP) 03591700XX  
: --  
: --  
: --  
HEADING  
NETWORK  
CHART NUMBER  
H. PULSE  
B. PULSE  
: --  
: --  
:
: OK  
: OK  
(22.5 rpm)  
No results appear when  
"sub" radar selected as  
radar source.  
ON TIME  
TX TIME  
:
:
000000.0 h  
000000.0 h  
Machine Status +115  
XX = Program Version No.  
Display unit test results (ex. MODEL1722C series)  
GPS sensor test  
Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test  
the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B when it is connected. The equipment displays  
GPS receiver program version number, and checks the GPS receiver for proper  
operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result. For any NG, request  
service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.  
For GPS-310B  
(4850238XX: for GP-320B)  
PROGRAM No. 4850218XX  
GPS UNIT : OK  
Machine Status + 115  
XX = Program Version No.  
GPS receiver test results  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
Network sounder (ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N) test  
Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST  
menu to test the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment  
displays network sounder program version number, checks the ROM and RAM,  
and displays water temperature (appropriate sensor required) and depth. The  
results of the ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For NG  
request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST  
menu.  
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX  
ROM 1, 2  
RAM  
: OK  
: OK  
TEMPERATURE  
: 77°F  
DEPTH  
: 4000ft  
Machine Status +115  
XX = Program Version No.  
For ETR-6/10N  
(0252310XX.XX for ETR-30N)  
Network sounder test results  
ARP test  
Not used.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.5.2  
Test pattern  
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors  
(MODEL1722C/1723C series) or tones (MODEL1722 series).  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.  
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.  
5. Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show test pattern.  
BLACK  
BLUE  
GREEN  
RED  
RETURN  
WHITE  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE  
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
PATTERN.  
RETURN  
PATTERN.  
MODEL1722C/1723C series  
MODEL1722 series  
Test patterns  
6. For the MODEL1722C/1723C series, push the [ENTER] knob consecutively  
to show white, red, green, blue and black colors.  
7. Press the RETURN soft key.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.5.3  
Keyboard, remote controller test  
The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller  
for proper operation.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.  
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.  
5. Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.  
K-BOARD  
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY  
3 TIMES TO RETURN  
TEST  
For Remote Controller  
For Display Unit  
I/R REMOTE CODE  
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller  
6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A  
key is functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black (color  
model) or green (monochrome model) when the key is pressed. For the  
[ENTER] knob, rotate it to show X-Y position; push it to confirm function.  
7. Press the [CLEAR] key on the display unit three times to escape from the  
test.  
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.6  
GPS Status Display  
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites, and is available  
with connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator  
outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV.  
1. Press the [MENU] key.  
2. Press SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR  
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.  
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.  
WAAS satellite  
(GPS-320B only)  
23:59:59  
FEB 27 2001  
Date  
N
GPS 3D  
21  
GPS fix state  
DOP value  
12  
W
26  
DOP  
1.2  
23  
20  
30  
29  
W
E
28  
ALT  
22 m  
05  
01  
GPS antenna height  
27  
17  
S
SAT  
SNR  
No.  
30  
40  
50  
23  
12  
29  
27  
01  
17  
26  
05  
20  
21  
30  
28  
123  
Receive signal level  
Bars show satellite  
signal levels. Satellites  
whose signal level  
extends past 40 are  
used to fix position.  
RETURN  
WAAS satellite  
(GPS-320B only)  
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.  
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.  
GPS status display  
4. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to finish.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.7  
Clearing Memories  
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder  
sections. These memories can be cleared to restore the unit to default settings.  
The following data are not cleared: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS  
level, tuning point, tuning indication (short, medium, long), dead sector, antenna  
type, on time, TX time.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.  
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.  
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.  
5. Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY UNIT  
NO  
GPS SENSOR  
EDIT  
NO  
NETWORK SOUNDER  
NO  
RETURN  
Memory clear menu  
6. Use the cursor pad to choose the memory to clear.  
7. Press the EDIT soft key.  
8. Use the cursor pad to select YES and press the ENTER soft key. One of the  
following displays appear depending on the selection made at step 6.  
ALL SETTINGS EXCEPT  
SNDR ARE RESET TO  
BEGIN COLD START TO  
CLEAR GPS  
SOUNDER WILL BE  
SET TO DEFAULT.  
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
ARE YOU SURE?  
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB  
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY  
Display Unit Clear  
GPS Receiver Clear  
Network Sounder Clear  
Windows for clearing memory  
9. Push the [ENTER] knob to clear memory selected.  
10.Press the MENU key to close the menu.  
11.Turn the power off, and on again.  
Note: Though the message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE  
CONTACT A LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY  
KEY TO CONTENUE” may appear when powering on the display unit  
immediately after the clearing memories, there is no problem in fact. Press any  
key to continue the operation.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
7.8  
Error Messages  
In addition to alarm message your equipment also displays equipment status  
menus.  
Equipment status error messages  
Error Message  
Meaning  
Remedy  
• Check that display unit where the  
sounder is connected is turned  
on.  
Connection with the ETR was Network sounder disconnected.  
cut.  
• Check network sounder’s  
cabling.  
• Check that display unit where the  
Connection with the RADAR  
was cut.  
Radar disconnected.  
radar is connected is turned on.  
• Check antenna cable.  
Have a qualified technician  
replace the battery.  
Low Voltage! Internal Battery Voltage of battery on circuit  
board in display unit is low.  
Check antenna cable.  
No bearing pulse detected.  
No bearing pulse from radar  
antenna.  
Check GPS navigator.  
No GPS fix!  
GPS navigator is turned off or  
no GPS position data.  
Check heading connector.  
Check heading sensor.  
Heading data missing!  
No heading pulse detected.  
No GPS position!  
No heading pulse  
Disconnect GPS cable from  
the display unit, and contact  
with your dealer.  
An error may occur on  
GP-310B/320B.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Menu Overview  
MENU key  
Radar  
MENU Key  
RADAR  
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)  
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRU)  
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)  
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM SECTOR), OFF)  
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)  
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,  
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)*  
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)*  
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)  
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)  
DATA BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu.)  
nm & sm range  
(0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64)  
km range  
RADAR  
RANGE  
SETUP  
(0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64)  
ARP SETUP  
(Requires ARP  
circuit board in  
network radar  
1833/1833C  
series.)  
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARPA, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)  
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)  
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)  
ARP VECTOR TIME (30seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15, 30minutes)  
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30sec; 1, 3, 6 minutes)  
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6nm)  
TCPA (30seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12minutes)  
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)  
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)  
* = MODEL1722C/1723C  
series only.  
FUNCTION  
SOFTKEY 1 - SOFTKEY 5  
KEY SETUP*  
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC,  
ECHO STRETCH, PULSE LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO  
TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF, TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM,  
TTM ON/OFF, WPT ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION, STBY/TX,  
RADAR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL  
Assigns function of each radar function key.)  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)  
* Default settings for function keys:  
SOFTKEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFTKEY 2, RANGE; SOFTKEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;  
SOFTKEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFTKEY 5, RADAR SOURCE  
AP-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Plotter  
* = Denotes MODEL1722C/1723C  
series only.  
MENU Key  
CHART SETUP  
CHART OFFSET (offsets chart position.)  
TRACKS  
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)  
& MARKS  
CONTROL  
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*  
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY (ON, OFF)  
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*  
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)  
TIME INTERVAL (0 - 99m59s, 0m 10s)  
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1nm)  
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (2000/8000 pts)  
CHART  
DETAILS  
LAT LON GRID (ON, OFF) (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*  
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)  
(
FURUNO,  
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)  
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)  
NavChartsTM  
)
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)  
LANDMASS (BRIGHT, DIM, OFF) (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, WHT)*  
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)  
NAVAIDS (ON, OFF)  
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)  
OTHER SYMBOLS (ON, OFF) (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, WHT)*  
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)  
CNTOUR LINE soft key  
DEPTH < 10m (ON, OFF, Red*)  
DEPTH = 10m (ON, OFF, Yellow*)  
DEPTH > 10m (ON, OFF, Light blue*)  
DEPTH INFORMATION (ON, OFF, Red*)  
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE (00000 - 00033 ft)  
2
1
AP-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
(Continued from previous page)  
2
1
CHART  
WAYPOINTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
DETAILS  
(C-MAP  
chart)  
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
CHART BORDER LINE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)*  
PORT & SERVICE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
ATTENTION AREA (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, PLOTTER/CONTOUR, OFF)*  
NAV LANE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
Page 1  
LIGHT(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, PLOT/NO SECTOR, OFF)*  
BUOY & BEACON (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
SIGNAL (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
PLACE NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
COMPASS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
TIDE & CURRENT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
NATURAL FEATURE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
RIVER & LAKE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
CULTURAL FEATURE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
LANDMARK (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
CHART GENERATION (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
NEW OBJECT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON (MULTIPLE, SINGLE)  
Page 2  
* = Denotes MODEL1722C/1723C  
series only.  
For MODEL 1722 series,  
ON and OFF.  
INFORMATION LEVEL (BASIC, DETAILED  
DEPTH INFO soft key  
BATHYMETRIC LINE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
SPOT SOUNDING (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
BOTTOM TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*  
DEPTH AREA LIMIT (0-99999ft, 20, 164 ft)  
BATHYMETRIC RANGE (0-99999, 0-99999 ft, 0-33 ft)  
PLOTTER  
SETUP  
WAYPOINTS SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)  
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)  
SET GOTO METHOD (1POINT, 35POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)  
QP (INTERNAL, EXT (RMB))  
1
AP-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
1
WAYPOINTS/  
ROUTES  
WAYPOINTS LOCAL LIST  
ALPHANUMERIC LIST  
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR  
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG  
ROUTES  
LOG  
GO TO soft key  
NEW ROUTE soft key  
EDIT ROUTE soft key  
ERASE ROUTE soft key  
RESTART soft key  
STOP/RE-LEASE soft key  
RVRSE soft key  
SPEED soft key  
COORD TYPE soft key  
CREATE  
VOYAGE-  
BASED  
NEW soft key  
SELECT ROUTE soft key  
(BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)  
ROUTE  
FUNCTION  
SOFTKEY 1 - SOFTKEY 5  
KEY SETUP*  
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO  
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT  
TRK, ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST,  
D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)  
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)  
* Defaut settings for function keys:  
SOFTKEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFTKEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE:  
SOFTKEY 3, RULER; SOFTKEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;  
SOFTKEY 5, ALPHA LIST  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)  
AP-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Sounder  
MENU Key  
SOUNDER  
MENU  
* = MODEL1722C/1723C series only  
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)  
CLUTTER (0 - 16(9), AUTO)  
WHITE MARKER (OFF, 1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color))*  
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)  
HUE (1-9, 1)*  
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4, SL5, SL6)  
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)  
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)  
SL1-SL2: Monochrome  
SL1-SL3: 8 color  
SL1-SL6: 16 color  
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR, 20)  
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu.)  
SOUNDER  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)  
TRANSMISSION (ON, OFF)  
TVG-HF (0 - 9, 3)  
STC-HF (0-10, 0)  
STC-LF (0-10, 0)  
FREQ. ADJ.-HF (-10.0-+10.0, 0)  
FREQ. ADJ.-LF (-10.0-+10.0, 0)  
TARGET ECHO (NORMAL, SURFACE)  
TVG-LF(0 - 9, 3)  
ECHO OFFSET-HF(-50 - +50, 0)  
ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50, 0)  
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100, 0)  
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100, 0)  
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)  
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1-SM4, SM3)  
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)  
SENSOR SETUP soft key  
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)  
TEMP. CALIBRATION (20 - +20 C/-40 - +40 F, 0 F)  
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +60m/-15 - +90ft/-15 - +30fa/-15 - +30PB, 0)  
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, +0m/s)  
SOUNDER  
RANGE  
SETUP  
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*  
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 30 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 PB, 10 PB)  
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m/6 m; 10 ft/20 ft; 2 fa/3 fa; 2 PB/3 PB)  
FUNCTION  
SOFTKEY 1- SOFTKEY 5  
KEY SETUP#  
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN-HF, GAIN-LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER,  
CLUTTER, WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV,  
TEMP. GRAPH, TVG-HF, TVG-LF, OFFSET-HF, OFFSET-LF,  
SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE, TLL OUTPUT, SNDR  
SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)  
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)  
* = Default sounder ranges  
Range 8  
Range 1  
Range 2  
Range 5  
Range 6  
Range 4  
Range 3  
Range 7  
ETR-6/10N  
ETR-30N  
5 m  
15 ft  
3 fa  
10 m  
30 ft  
5 fa  
20 m  
60 ft  
40 m  
120 ft  
20 fa  
80 m  
200 ft  
40 fa  
150 m  
400 ft  
80 fa  
300 m  
1000 ft  
150 fa  
200 PB  
1200 m  
1500 m  
4000 ft  
650 fa  
4500 ft  
900 fa  
10 fa  
10 PB  
700PB  
900 PB  
3 PB  
5 PB  
30 PB  
50 PB  
100 PB  
# Default settings for function keys:  
SOFTKEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFTKEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFTKEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL:  
SOFTKEY 4, NOISE LIMITER, SOFTKEY 5, PICTURE ADV  
AP-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
System configuration  
MENU key  
SYSTEM  
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)  
LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, others)  
GENERAL  
SETUP  
CONFIGURATION  
RANGE UNIT  
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)  
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)  
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)  
Page 1  
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)  
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)  
RESET TRIP LOG (Yes, NO)  
SPEED SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)  
LAT/LON DISPLAY  
(DD° MM. MM ,  
DD° MM. MMM  
DD° MM. MMMM  
DD° MM SS.S )  
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)  
SPEED (SOG, STW)  
Page 2  
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD)  
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)  
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)  
RANGE & BEARING MODE  
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)  
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)  
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL 07.0 W)  
* = MODEL1722 series only.  
NAV  
NAV  
POSITION SOURCE  
OPTION  
SOURCE  
SETTING  
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)  
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 sec,  
0060 sec)  
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:00 to+13:30 hr, +0:00)  
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)  
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)  
3
4
AP-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
3
4
GPS  
SENSOR  
SETTINGS  
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:00-+13:30, +0:00)  
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, WGS-72, OTHER)  
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 sec, 0 sec)  
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 sec 5 sec)  
GPS SPEED AVERAGING (0 - 999 sec, 60 sec)  
LATITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.999, 0 N)  
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.999, 0 E)  
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)  
LATITUDE (45 35.000’ N)  
LONGITUDE (125 00.000’’ W)  
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999m, 5 m)  
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D,)  
COLD START (YES, NO)  
GPS STATUS soft key  
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)  
WAAS SETUP soft key  
(Only when GPS-320B is connected.)  
WAAS MODE (On, Off)  
WAAS SEARCH (Auto, Manual)  
DISABLE GEO  
WAAS ALARM (On, Off)  
CORRECTION DATA SET (02)  
TD SETUP  
GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))  
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9 to +999.9 µs, 0 µs)  
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9 to +999.9 µs, 0 µs)  
CHAIN (01: R-G (S Baltic))  
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99 to +99.99 lane, 0 lane)  
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99 to +99.99 lane, 0 lane)  
3
AP-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
3
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
PORT  
SETUP  
GPS/NMEA  
PORT  
(DATA 1)  
FURUNO GPS  
SENSOR (YES, NO)  
OUTPUT FORMAT  
(NMEA0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)  
LAT/LON FORMAT  
(DD MM. MM  
DD MM. MMM  
DD MM. MMMM )  
OUTPUT DESTINATION  
(YES, NO)  
SELECT SNTNC  
*1  
(soft key)  
PC/NMEA  
EXT. BUZZ  
PORT  
NMEA OUTPUT FORMAT  
(NMEA Ver.1.5, 2.0)  
BAUD RATE  
(DATA 3)  
(4800, 9600, 19200 (bps))  
BIT LENGTH (7bits, 8bits)  
STOP BIT (1 bit, 2 bits)  
PARITY  
(EVEN, ODD, NONE)  
SELECT SNTNC  
*2  
(soft key)  
#1  
#2  
*1  
= AAM, APB, BOD, BWR/BWC , DPT/DBT ,  
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC,  
VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, TTM  
#1  
= BWR with rhumb line; BWC with great circle  
#2  
= DPT with NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0;  
DBT with NMEA 0183 Ver 1.5.  
5
6
3
#1  
#2  
*2  
= AAM, APB, BOD, BWR/BWC , DPT/DBT ,  
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC,  
VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, TTM  
AP-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
5
3
6
OUTPUT  
THROUGH  
NETWORK  
AAM, APB, BOD, BWR, DBT, DPT,  
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB,  
RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA,  
HDT, HDG, MWV  
Chooses data sentences to output to  
NavNet equipment.  
TEST &  
CLEAR  
MEMORY  
I/O TEST  
DISPLAY UNIT TEST  
GPS SENSOR TEST* NETWORK  
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**  
ARP TEST***  
KEY BOARD & REMOTE TEST  
(Tests keyboard and remote controller.)  
TEST PATTERN  
(Displays test pattern.)  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY UNIT (Yes, No)  
GPS SENSOR (Yes, No)  
NETWORK SOUNDER (Yes, No)  
HOT PAGE SETUP  
(Sets up hot pages 1-5.)  
HOT PAGE  
& NAV  
DATA  
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP  
(Configures nav data displays.)  
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
SIMULATION  
SETUP  
RADAR  
(SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)  
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)  
SOUNDER (SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)  
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt, 0 kt)  
COURSE (8 Figure, Direction 0.0-359.9°, 0.0°  
LATITUDE (85°0.0’N-85°0.0’ , 45°35.0’N)  
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’ W)  
START DATE & TIME (00:00 24. NOV. 01)  
RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)  
3
*
= Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B  
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N  
*** = Requires ARP-equipped MODEL1833/1833C  
series network radar.)  
AP-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
3
DATA  
TRANSFER  
UPLOAD/  
DOWNLOAD  
DATA  
DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC  
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,  
MARKS & LINES ON, OFF)  
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC  
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,  
MARKS & LINES ON, OFF)  
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD  
(TRACKS ON, OFF , MARKS & LINES ON, OFF,  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,  
SETTING DATA ON, OFF)  
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD  
(TRACK ON, OFF, MARKS & LINES ON, OFF,  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,  
SETTING DATA ON, OFF)  
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receives waypoint  
data from Yeoman.)  
RECEIVE DATA  
VIA NETWORK  
HOST NAME (PLOT)  
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)  
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES  
(ON, OFF)  
AP-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
ALARM key  
ALARM key  
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)  
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))  
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))  
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)  
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))  
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)  
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)  
Plotter  
Alarms  
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)  
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)  
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)  
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)  
NEXT PAGE soft key (Shows BOTTOM, TEMPERATURE alarms.)  
ALARM key  
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)  
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)  
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)  
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)  
Sounder  
Alarms  
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)  
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)  
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)  
ALARM key  
SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)  
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)  
Radar  
Alarm  
AP-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
086: NAMIBIA: Namibia  
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago  
088: NORTHAMERICAN 1927 : Western United States  
089: : Eastern United States  
Geodetic Chart List  
001: WGS84  
090: : Alaska  
002: WGS72  
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)  
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island  
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)  
094: : Alberta and British Columbia  
095: : East Canada  
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)  
004: NORTHAMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)  
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value  
006:AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island  
007:ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)  
008: : Ethiopia  
096: : Manitoba and Ontario  
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan  
098: : Yukon  
009: : Mall  
010: : Senegal  
099: : Canal Zone  
011: : Sudan  
100: : Caribbean  
012:AFG : Somalia  
101: : CentralAmerica  
013:AIN ELABD 1970 : Bahrain Island  
014:ANNA1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island  
015:ARC 1950 : Mean Value  
102: : Cuba  
103: : Greenland  
104: : Mexico  
016: : Botswana  
105: NORTHAMERICAN 1983 : Alaska  
106: : Canada  
017: : Lesotho  
018: : Malawi  
107: : CONUS  
019: : Swaziland  
108: : Mexico, CentralAmerica  
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)  
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt  
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value  
112: : Hawaii  
020: : Zaire  
021: : Zambia  
022: : Zimbabwe  
023:ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)  
024: : Kenya  
113: : Kaual  
025: : Tanzania  
114: : Maui  
026:ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island  
027:ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island  
028:ASTRO B4 SOR.ATOLL :Tem Island  
029:ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island  
030:ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island  
031:AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island  
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands  
033: BERMUDA1957 : Bermuda Islands  
034: BOGOTAOBSERVATORY : Colombia  
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina  
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands  
037: CAPE : South Africa  
115: : Oahu  
116: OMAN : Oman  
117: ORDNANCE SURVEYOF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value  
118: : England  
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales  
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands  
121: : Wales  
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands  
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island  
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53°s)  
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTHAMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value  
126: : Bolivia  
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)  
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia  
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)  
041: CHUAASTRO : Paraguay  
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)  
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)  
129: : Colombia  
130: : Ecuador  
042: CORREGOALEGRE : Brazil  
043: DJAKARTA(BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)  
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)  
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island  
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe  
047: : Cyprus  
131: : Guyana  
132: : Peru  
133: : Venezuela  
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands  
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar  
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland  
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands  
138: SANTNABRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)  
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island  
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island  
141: SOUTHAMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value  
142: : Argentina  
048: : Egypt  
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands  
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands  
051: : Greece  
052: : Iran  
053: : ItalySardinia  
054: : ItalySicily  
143: : Bolivia  
055: : Norway and Finland  
144: : Brazil  
056: : Portugal and Spain  
145: : Chile  
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value  
058: GANDAJIKABASE : Republic of Maldives  
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand  
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island  
061: GUX 1ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island  
062: HJORSEY1955 : Iceland  
146: : Colombia  
147: : Ecuador  
148: : Guyana  
149: : Paraguay  
150: : Peru  
151: : Trinidad and Tobago  
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong  
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam  
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal  
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland  
067: ISTS 073ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia  
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island  
069: KANDAWALA: Sri Lanka  
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island  
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore  
072: LAREUNION : Mascarene Island  
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island  
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia  
152: : Venezuela  
153: SOUTHASIA: Singapore  
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands  
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands  
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)  
157: TOKYO : Japan  
158: : Korea  
159: : Okinawa  
160: TRISTANASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha  
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)  
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands  
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname  
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)  
076: : Mindanao Island  
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island  
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)  
165: CAMPAREAASTRO : Camp McmurdoArea,Antarctica  
166: G. SEGARA: Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)  
167: HERAT NORTH :Afghanistan  
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan  
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY1925 : Madagascar  
170: YACARE : Uruguay  
078: MARCOASTRO : Salvage Islands  
079: MASSAWA: Eritrea (Ethiopia)  
080: MERCHICH : Morocco  
081: MIDWAYASTRO 1961 : Midway Island  
082: MINNA: Nigeria  
171: RT-90 : Sweden  
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia  
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)  
084: : United Arab Emirates  
085: : SaudiArabia  
AP-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
World Time Chart  
AP-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Icons  
Icon  
Meaning  
North marker. Points to North.  
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.  
Chart overenlarged.  
Chart card not inserted.  
Wrong chart card inserted.  
Chart scale too small.  
Plotter, sounder alarm setting violated.  
Track is not being recorded or plotted.  
Chart offset applied.  
Voyage-based route being created.  
S A  
V E  
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.  
Simulation mode  
S
I
M
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer  
about replacement.  
AP-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR  
MODEL 1722/1732/1742/1752/1762  
MODEL 1722C/1732C/1742C/1752C/1762C  
MODEL 1723C/1733C/1753C/1763C  
1. GENERAL  
1.1 Indication System  
M1722 series  
PPI Daylight display, raster scan, 4 tones monochrome LCD  
M1722C/1723C series PPI Daylight display, raster scan, color LCD  
1.2 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)  
Range (nm) Pulse length (µs)  
PRR (Hz approx.)  
0.125 to 1.5  
1.5 to 3  
0.08  
0.3  
2100  
1200  
600  
3 to 48*  
0.8  
*Maximum Range: M1722/C/1723C: 24nm, M1732/1742/1752 (C)/1733C/1753C: 36nm,  
M1762/C/1763C: 48nm  
1.3 Range Resolution  
All models: 21 m  
1.4 Bearing Resolution  
M1722/C/1723C: 6.7°, M1732/C/1733C: 5.5°, M1742/C: 5.0°,  
M1752/C/1753C: 4.0°, M1762/C/1763C: 3.9°  
M1722 (C)/1723C: 27 m, M1732 (C)/1733C: 35 m,  
M1742 (C): 41 m, M1752 (C)/1753C: 27 m,  
M1762 (C)/1763C: 30 m  
1.5 Minimum Range  
1.6 Bearing Accuracy  
±1°  
1.7 Range Ring Accuracy  
0.9 % of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater  
2. SCANNER UNIT  
2.1 MODEL1722/1722C/1723C:  
2.1.1 Radiator  
Micro-strip  
Horizontal  
2.1.2 Polarization  
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation Speed 23 rpm nominal  
2.1.4 Radiator Length  
45 cm  
5.2°  
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth  
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth  
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation  
25°  
-20 dB  
2.2 MODEL1732/1732C/1733C:  
2.2.1 Radiator  
Printed waveguide array  
Horizontal  
2.2.2 Polarization  
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal  
SP - 1  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.4 Radiator Length  
60 cm  
4°  
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth  
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth  
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation  
20°  
-18 dB  
2.3 MODEL1742/1742C:  
2.3.1 Radiator  
Slotted waveguide array  
Horizontal  
2.3.2 Polarization  
2.3.3 Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal  
2.3.4 Radiator Length  
60 cm  
3.5°  
2.3.5 Horizontal Beamwidth  
2.3.6 Vertical Beamwidth  
2.3.7 Sidelobe Attenuation  
30°  
-20 dB  
2.4 MODEL1752/1752C/1753C:  
2.4.1 Radiator  
Slotted waveguide array  
Horizontal  
2.4.2 Polarization  
2.4.3 Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal  
2.4.4 Radiator Length  
70 cm  
3.4°  
2.4.5 Horizontal Beamwidth  
2.4.6 Vertical Beamwidth  
2.4.7 Sidelobe Attenuation  
30°  
-20 dB  
2.5 MODEL1762/1762C/1763C:  
2.5.1 Radiator  
Slotted waveguide array  
Horizontal  
2.5.2 Polarization  
2.5.3 Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal  
2.5.4 Radiator Length  
100 cm  
2.4°  
2.5.5 Horizontal Beamwidth  
2.5.6 Vertical Beamwidth  
2.5.7 Sidelobe Attenuation  
27°  
-24 dB  
3. TRANSCEIVER MODULE  
3.1 Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N  
3.2 Peak Output Power  
M1722/1742/1722C/1742C/1723C: 2 kW nominal,  
M1732/1752/1762/1732C/1752C/1762C/1733C/1753C/1763C:  
4 kW nominal  
FET Switching Method  
60 MHz  
3.3 Modulator  
3.4 Intermediate Frequency  
SP - 2  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5 Tuning  
Automatic  
3.6 Receiver Front End  
3.7 Bandwidth  
MIC (Microwave IC)  
M1722/1732/1742/1762 (C)/1723C/1733C/1763C: 7 MHz  
M1752/1752C/1753C: 3 MHz (L)/ 10MHz (S/M)  
Circulator with diode limiter  
3.8 Duplexer  
3.9 Warming up  
M1722/1722C/1723C: 60 s approx.  
M1732/1742/1752/1762(C)/1733C/1753C/1763C: 90 s approx.  
4. DISPLAY UNIT  
4.1 Display  
M1722 /1732/1742/1752/1762:  
7 inch rectangular monochrome LCD, 240(H) x 320(V) dots  
Effective radar display area: 216 x 216 dots  
M1722C/1732C/1742C/1752C/1762C:  
7 inch rectangular color LCD, 234(H) x 320(V) dots,  
Effective radar display area: 216 x 216 dots  
M1723C/1733C/1753C/1763C:  
7 inch rectangular color LCD, 480 (H) x 640 (V) dots  
Effective radar display area: 432 x 432 dots  
4.2 Range, Range Ring Interval (RRI), Number of Rings  
Range (NM)  
RRI (NM)  
0.125 0.25  
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12  
3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4  
0.5 0.75  
1
1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48  
Number of Rings  
2
2
4
3
4
3
4
Maximum range: M1722/C/1723C: 24nm, M1732/1742/1752(C)/1733C/1753C: 36nm,  
M1762/C/1763C: 48nm  
4.3. Markers  
Heading Line, Bearing Scale, Range Rings,  
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),  
Alarm Zone, Waypoint Mark (navigation input required)  
4.4. Alphanumeric Indications Range, Range Ring Interval, Interference Rejection (IR),  
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),  
Stand-by (ST-BY), Guard Alarm (G(IN), G(OUT)),  
Echo Stretch (ES), Echo Tailing (TRAIL), Trailing Time,  
Watchman (WATCHMAN)  
4.5. Input Data  
Own ship’s position:  
IEC 61162-1  
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL  
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW  
HDT>HDG*1>HDM*1  
RMC>RMA>VTG  
DPT>DBT  
Ship’s speed:  
Bearing (True):  
Course:  
Water depth:  
SP - 3  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wind:  
MWV>VWT>VWR  
Water Temperature:  
Time:  
MTW  
ZDA  
*1: calculated by magnetic deviation  
4.6. Output Data  
Alarm signal  
12 VDC, 100 mA or less  
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5  
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)  
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,  
DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required), TTM (ARPA required)  
5. PLOTTER FUNCTION  
5.1 Projection  
Mercator  
5.2 Usable Area  
5.3 Effective Area  
5.4 Display pixels  
85 latitude or below  
133.4 x 97.3 mm  
240 x 320 dots (M1722 series), 234 x 320 dots (M1722C series),  
480 x 640 dots (1723C series)  
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP  
5.5 Position Indication  
5.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 2,048 nm (at equatorial area)  
5.7 Track Display  
Plot interval: by time (1 s to 99 m 59 s) or  
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)  
5.8 Colors  
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white  
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points  
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each  
1 point  
5.9 Memory Capacity  
5.10 Storage Capacity  
5.11 MOB  
5.12 Quick Routes  
5.13 Electronic Chart  
1 course with 35 waypoints max.  
FURUNO chart card or NAVIONICS chart card available  
C-MAP chart card also available for C-MAP NT Model  
Arrival and anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity alarms,  
Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature, Trip alarm,  
Bottom alarm, Fish alarm (ETR required)  
5.14 Alarms  
6. POWER SUPPLY  
6.1 Rated Voltage/Current  
M1722  
12-24 VDC: 3.8-1.9 A  
12-24 VDC: 3.8-1.9 A  
12-24 VDC: 4.6-2.3 A  
12-24 VDC: 5.7-2.9 A  
12-24 VDC: 4.0-2.0 A  
12-24 VDC: 4.0-2.0 A  
M1732  
M1742/1752  
M1762  
M1722C  
M1732C  
SP - 4  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M1742C  
M1752C  
12-24 VDC: 5.0-2.5 A  
12-24 VDC: 5.4-2.7 A  
12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A  
12-24 VDC: 4.8-2.3 A  
12-24 VDC: 4.0-2.0 A  
12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A  
12-24 VDC: 5.5-2.8 A  
M1762C  
M1723C  
M1733C  
M1753C  
M1763C  
6.2 Rectifier  
PR-62 (option for M1722/1732 (C)/1723C/1733C)  
100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz  
RU-3423 (option for M1742/1752/1762 (C)/1753C/1763C)  
100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz  
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION  
7.1 Ambient Temperature  
(IEC 60945)  
Scanner Unit: -25°C to +70°C  
Display Unit: -15°C to +55°C  
93 % or less at +40°C  
Scanner Unit: IPX6  
Display Unit: IPX5  
IEC 60945  
7.2 Relative Humidity  
7.3 Waterproofing  
(IEC 60529)  
7.4 Bearing Vibration  
8. COATING COLOR  
8.1 Display Unit  
8.2 Scanner Unit  
N3.0  
M1722/1732 (C)/1723C/1733C  
N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)  
M1742/1752/1762 (C)/1753C/1763C N9.5  
SP - 5  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
SP - 6  
E3494S01K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
A
B
A/C RAIN......................................................2-5  
A/C SEA .......................................................2-4  
ACQ soft key...............................................2-36  
ALARM key  
Battery replacement ..................................... 7-2  
Bearing measurement by EBL.................... 2-15  
Bearing reference......................................... 5-2  
Bottom alarm.............................................. 4-20  
Bottom discrimination display........................ 4-6  
Bottom echo............................................... 4-25  
Bottom-lock display ...................................... 4-6  
Bottom-zoom display.................................... 4-5  
Brilliance ...................................................... 1-9  
plotter .....................................................3-53  
radar.......................................................2-30  
sounder ..................................................4-19  
Alarms  
anchor watch ..........................................3-55  
arrival......................................................3-54  
audio ......................................................3-53  
bottom ....................................................4-20  
CPA/TCPA..............................................2-42  
fish(B/L)..................................................4-21  
fish(normal).............................................4-20  
guard ......................................................2-30  
lost target................................................2-43  
messages...............................................3-59  
messages (sounder) ...............................4-23  
proximity.................................................3-57  
speed......................................................3-56  
trip..........................................................3-58  
water temperature...................................4-22  
XTE (cross track error)............................3-56  
Anchor watch alarm ....................................3-55  
ARPA  
C
CENTER soft key ......................................... 3-9  
CHART DETAILS menu.............................. 5-16  
CHART OFFSET soft key........................... 5-12  
Charts  
C-MAP chart attributes ........................... 5-16  
cursor and data display (C-MAP)............ 3-14  
data for aids to navigation....................... 3-12  
FURUNO chart attributes........................ 5-17  
icon data (C-MAP).................................. 3-15  
icons ...................................................... 3-13  
inserting ................................................... 1-6  
Nav-Charts™ chart attributes.................. 5-13  
offsetting ................................................ 5-16  
port service icons ................................... 3-13  
symbols for FURUNO, Nav-Charts™...... 3-12  
tide information (C-MAP) ........................ 3-16  
CLEAR ALARM soft key ............................. 4-19  
Clutter rejector............................................ 4-13  
C-MAP charts  
acquisition of targets...............................2-36  
activating ................................................2-35  
CPA/TCPA alarm.....................................2-42  
data ........................................................2-41  
deactivating ............................................2-35  
lost target alarm ......................................2-43  
past position display................................2-40  
tracking termination.................................2-38  
vector......................................................2-39  
ARPA SETUP menu....................................2-36  
Arrival alarm ...............................................3-54  
A-scope display ............................................4-7  
Audio alarm ................................................3-53  
Auto course-up mode....................................3-8  
AUTO S.SPD soft key.................................2-21  
attributes................................................ 5-16  
cursor and data display........................... 3-14  
icon data ................................................ 3-15  
tide information....................................... 3-16  
CNTL PLOT soft key................................... 1-13  
CNTL RADAR soft key................................ 1-13  
Colors (MODEL-1722C/1723C series)  
echoes (radar).......................................... 5-4  
echoes (sounder) ................................... 4-18  
COMPASS CNTRL soft key................... 3-4, 3-5  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Compass display ..........................................3-3  
Contrast........................................................1-9  
Controls  
EDIT XT-LMT soft key ........................... 3-4, 3-5  
ENTER knob................................................ 1-4  
ETA calculation............................................2-49  
display unit................................................1-2  
remote controller.......................................1-5  
Course-up mode  
F
Fish alarm (normal)  
level ........................................................5-30  
setting.....................................................4-20  
Fish school echo .........................................4-26  
Fish(B/L) alarm............................................4-21  
Fix mode (GPS receiver GP-310B)..............5-25  
Formatting memory cards............................. 6-1  
FREQ LF/HF soft key................................... 4-3  
FTC (Fast Time Constant) ............................ 2-6  
Function key  
plotter .......................................................3-8  
radar.......................................................2-10  
CPA/TCPA alarm.........................................2-42  
Cursor ..........................................................1-8  
CURSOR soft key.......................................2-18  
D
Data boxes  
erasing ...................................................1-15  
hiding......................................................1-15  
rearranging .............................................1-15  
setup ......................................................5-13  
showing ..................................................1-15  
DEPTH INFO soft key.................................5-16  
Depth measurement ................................... 4-11  
Depth source ................................................5-2  
Depth unit.....................................................5-2  
Diagnostics  
setup (plotter)..........................................5-10  
setup (radar)............................................. 5-7  
setup (sounder) .......................................5-34  
Function keys  
function execution ...................................1-16  
Fuse replacement......................................... 7-2  
G
GAIN key  
radar ........................................................ 2-2  
Sounder ................................................... 4-9  
GENERAL SETUP menu.............................. 5-1  
Geodetic datum...........................................5-17  
Geodetic datum (GPS receiver GP-310B)....5-24  
Geodetic datum codes................................ A-12  
GPS SETUP menu  
keyboard test.......................................... 7-11  
memory I/O test ........................................7-7  
test menu..................................................7-7  
test pattern..............................................7-10  
DISP key ....................................................1-12  
Display modes............................................ 1-11  
DISPLY MODE soft key.................................4-2  
Downloading data .........................................6-5  
Dual frequency display..................................4-4  
(GPS receiver GP-310B) .........................5-24  
GPS speed average  
(GPS receiver GP-310B) .........................5-24  
GPS status display......................................7-12  
GPS/NMEA port ..........................................5-35  
Guard alarm  
E
E. AVG soft key...........................................2-28  
E. STR soft key...........................................2-27  
EBL reference...............................................5-8  
EBL soft key................................................2-22  
EBL/VRM key .............................................2-14  
Echo averaging (log amp radar only)...........2-28  
Echo offset (sounder)..................................5-31  
Echo stretch................................................3-27  
cancelling................................................3-31  
setting.....................................................2-30  
H
Heading line................................................2-17  
Head-up mode ............................................. 2-9  
Highway display ........................................... 3-5  
HL OFF soft key ..........................................2-17  
Hot page setup............................................5-21  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Hue  
charts, radar (MODEL-1722C/1723C series)  
Messages  
memory cards .......................................... 6-3  
plotter alarms ......................................... 2-57  
sounder alarms....................................... 4-23  
MOB mark.................................................. 1-14  
MODE/D. BOX soft key ................................ 4-8  
Multiple echoes (radar)............................... 3-42  
...........................................................1-10  
sounder (MODEL-1722C/1723C series)..4-18  
I
I. REJ. soft key............................................2-18  
Icons........................................................ AP-14  
Interference rejection  
N
radar.......................................................2-18  
sounder ..................................................4-12  
Nav data display........................................... 2-6  
NAV DATA menu ........................................ 5-22  
Nav data source ......................................... 5-16  
NAV OPTION menu.................................... 5-16  
Navigation  
K
Keyboard test.............................................. 7-11  
Keying pulse...............................................5-30  
canceling route navigation...................... 2-50  
port, port services................................... 2-44  
quick point.............................................. 2-43  
restarting................................................ 2-48  
routes..................................................... 2-47  
switching waypoints in a route ................ 2-49  
waypoints............................................... 2-44  
Navigator  
L
Language......................................................5-2  
Latitude, longitude display.............................5-2  
LOAD DATA menu ........................................6-5  
Local time...................................................5-24  
Lost target alarm.........................................2-43  
M
setup...................................................... 5-16  
NavNet  
Magnetic variation.........................................5-2  
Maintenance  
image source.......................................... 1-13  
receiving data from................................... 6-9  
NEXT INFO soft key...........................2-56, 4-22  
NMEA port.................................................. 5-37  
Noise limiter (sounder)................................ 4-12  
Noise rejection  
battery replacement ..................................7-2  
fuse replacement ......................................7-2  
preventive.................................................7-1  
Marker-zoom display.....................................4-5  
Marks  
radar ...................................................... 3-15  
North marker .............................................. 3-15  
North-up mode  
color .......................................................2-24  
connecting ..............................................2-25  
entering ..................................................2-24  
erasing all...............................................2-26  
erasing individual ....................................2-26  
shape......................................................2-24  
Memory  
plotter....................................................... 2-7  
radar ...................................................... 3-10  
O
Offset EBL.................................................. 2-22  
OFFSET soft key........................................ 2-22  
clearing................................................... 7-11  
testing.......................................................7-6  
Memory cards  
P
error messages.........................................6-3  
formatting..................................................6-1  
playing back..............................................6-4  
saving data to ...........................................6-2  
Memory I/O test ............................................7-6  
PC/NMEA/EXT BUZZ port.......................... 5-37  
Picture advance speed ............................... 4-16  
PLOTTER SETUP menu .............................. 5-3  
Port setup  
GPS/NMEA port ..................................... 5-35  
NMEA port.............................................. 5-37  
PC/NMEA/EXT BUZZ port...................... 5-37  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Port, port services  
SAVE DATA menu........................................ 6-1  
SAVE/MOB key...........................................1-14  
Sensor setup...............................................5-30  
SENSOR SETUP menu...............................5-31  
SENSOR SETUP soft key ...........................5-30  
Shadow sectors...........................................3-43  
SHIFT soft key....................................3-19, 4-10  
Sidelobe echoes..........................................3-42  
Signal level erasure (sounder) .....................4-14  
SIM SETUP menu.......................................1-18  
Simulation display .......................................1-18  
Smoothing echoes (sounder).......................5-30  
Soft keys...................................................... 1-3  
Speed alarm................................................2-54  
Speed averaging .........................................5-16  
Speed display............................................... 5-2  
Speed/course smoothing  
icons.......................................................2-12  
navigating to...........................................2-44  
Position smoothing......................................5-18  
POWER/BRILL key................................1-7, 1-8  
Presentation mode  
plotter .......................................................2-7  
radar.........................................................3-8  
Proximity alarm...........................................3-57  
Pulselength (radar) .......................................3-7  
R
Racon.........................................................3-46  
RADAR SETTING menu (radar)..................5-23  
RADAR TX soft key.......................................3-2  
Range  
measurement by cursor (plotter) ............. 4-11  
measurement by cursor (radar)............... 3-11  
measurement by range rings (radar) ....... 3-11  
measurement by VRM (radar).................3-12  
plotter .......................................................2-9  
radar.........................................................3-6  
setup (radar)...........................................5-25  
setup (sounder).......................................5-32  
unit of measurement .................................5-2  
RANGE key  
(GPS Receiver GP-310B)........................5-18  
SPLIT soft key.............................................. 4-7  
System configuration.......................................xi  
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder) ...............5-29  
T
TARGET soft key.........................................3-22  
Target trails  
brilliance (GP/GD-1700C)........................3-23  
color (GP/GD-1700C)..............................3-24  
gradation (GP/GD-1700C).......................3-23  
start.........................................................3-23  
time.........................................................3-22  
TD display.................................................... 5-2  
TD OPTION menu.......................................5-20  
TD setup  
plotter .......................................................2-9  
radar.........................................................3-6  
sounder ....................................................4-9  
Remote controller .........................................1-5  
RESET XTE soft key..............................2-4, 2-5  
RINGS soft key........................................... 3-11  
Routes  
cancelling navigation of...........................2-50  
connecting..............................................2-37  
entering from route list ............................2-35  
entering with cursor.................................2-36  
erasing ...................................................2-42  
following .................................................2-47  
inserting waypoint from plotter display.....2-39  
inserting waypoint from route list.............2-38  
removing waypoint from..........................2-40  
switching waypoints in route navigation... 2-49  
voyage based .........................................2-40  
Decca......................................................5-21  
Loran C...................................................5-20  
Test menu .................................................... 7-5  
Test pattern .................................................. 7-8  
Time notation................................................ 5-2  
TIME soft key..............................................3-22  
TLL data output (radar)................................3-26  
TLL OUTPUT key........................................3-26  
Track  
color of other targets' (GP/GD-1700C) .....2-19  
color of own ship's (GP/GD-1700C).........2-19  
displaying other targets'...........................2-18  
displaying own ship's...............................2-17  
erasing all own ship's ..............................2-23  
erasing all targets’ ...................................2-23  
S
SART..........................................................3-44  
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver GP-310B).. 5-19  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
erasing own ship's by area......................2-22  
erasing own ship's by color .....................2-23  
memory capacity.....................................2-21  
plotting interval........................................2-20  
plotting method .......................................2-20  
plotting of own ship's...............................2-18  
TRACK HALT soft key.................................2-18  
TRACK RESUME soft key ..........................2-18  
TRAIL COLOR soft key...............................3-24  
TRAIL soft key ............................................3-23  
Trip alarm ...................................................2-55  
Trip distance resetting.................................2-16  
Troubleshooting ............................................7-3  
True motion mode.......................................3-10  
Tuning ..........................................................3-5  
TVG............................................................5-30  
Tx sector (radar) .........................................5-24  
Water temperature alarm............................ 4-21  
Water temperature graph............................ 4-23  
Water temperature unit................................. 5-2  
Waypoint marker (radar)............................. 3-30  
Waypoints  
changing size ......................................... 2-33  
editing from waypoint list ........................ 2-30  
editing waypoint position......................... 2-31  
editing with cursor .................................. 2-31  
entering at own ship position .................. 2-27  
entering by range and bearing ................ 2-29  
entering with cursor ................................ 2-27  
erasing from waypoint list ....................... 2-32  
erasing with cursor ................................. 2-32  
loading from Yeoman................................ 6-8  
navigating to........................................... 2-44  
searching ............................................... 2-34  
switching in route navigation................... 2-49  
White marker.............................................. 4-15  
World time chart .........................................A-12  
WPT MK soft key........................................ 3-30  
U
Uploading data..............................................6-5  
V
X
Vector (ARPA).............................................3-35  
Virtual image...............................................3-43  
VRM (Variable Range Marker)  
XTE (cross track error) alarm...................... 3-56  
Y
radar.......................................................3-12  
sounder .................................................. 4-11  
VRM soft key ..............................................3-13  
Yeoman........................................................ 6-8  
Z
W
Zero line..................................................... 4-24  
Zoom.......................................................... 3-17  
ZOOM/D.BOX soft key ............................... 3-17  
W. MAN soft key .........................................3-29  
Watchman ..................................................3-29  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Eiki Projector LC 4200 User Manual
Electro Voice Portable Speaker DMC 1122 User Manual
FireplaceXtrordinair Indoor Fireplace 864TRV User Manual
Fujitsu Network Card DQPSK User Manual
Fujitsu Printer DL1150 1250 User Manual
Fusion Car Speaker MS FR4021 User Manual
GE Air Conditioner AZ29E12EAC User Manual
Gefen Network Router EXT HDMI13 145 User Manual
GE Monogram Trash Compactor ZCGP150PII User Manual
GE Vacuum Cleaner 106766 User Manual